<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Fiver</id>
	<title>ICA-AtoM - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Fiver"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/Special:Contributions/Fiver"/>
	<updated>2026-05-30T07:26:20Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.35.4</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_archival_description&amp;diff=12684</id>
		<title>Add a new archival description</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_archival_description&amp;diff=12684"/>
		<updated>2012-06-28T22:41:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Add a new top level description */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit archival descriptions]] &amp;gt; Create a new archival description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add a new top level description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]], hover your cursor over the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; menu.[[Image:addNew.png|400px|right|thumb|Go to Add &amp;gt; Archival descriptions]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Archival descriptions&amp;quot; from the drop-down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# ICA-AtoM takes you to a blank [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# On loading, the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] displays the record with all [[Glossary#Information area|information areas]] closed; click on an [[Glossary#Information area|information area]] to access the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] grouped under it. Enter data as required.&lt;br /&gt;
# You can quit the create process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new record will be created.[[Image:archDescCreate.png|400px|right|thumb|Save (create) or cancel the new record ISAD template]] [[Image:RAD_ArchivalDesc.png|400px|right|thumb|Save (create) or cancel the new record RAD template]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot; button]] in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default status of a newly created archival description is DRAFT. Under the [[Glossary#Administration area|Administration area]] users with publication privileges can select [[Glossary#Published record|PUBLISHED]] as the new status of the archival description, making it available for read access to the public.[[Image:ArchDescPublish.png|400px|right|thumb|Default draft, Select published]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add a new child description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create new [[Glossary#Child record|child records]] in one of two ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New child description: OPTION ONE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]], in the ISAD identity [[Glossary#Information area|information area]], or the RAD title and statement responsibility area, enter the relevant data under &amp;quot;Add new child levels&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Note that you can add as many levels as needed at one time; for example, to add multiple series to a fonds or collection, fill in the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] under the &amp;quot;Add new child levels&amp;quot; and add as many lower levels as desired. When the record is saved, you will be able to see the new [[Glossary#Child record|child records]] in the [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]]. The example provided uses the RAD template for a Fonds level description in which the user has started adding a new child at the series level, titled: &amp;quot;Licensing&amp;quot;. [[Image:RAD-ChildLevels.png|400px|right|thumb|RAD title and statement area, add new child level]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Here is an example of the ISAD data entry template for an existing fonds that the user is adding new child levels.Remember to save all changes.[[Image:archDescAddNew.png|400px|right|thumb|ISAD - Add multiple new child records to a parent record]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Once you have saved the child levels, you can see in this RAD example that the &amp;quot;Licensing&amp;quot; series is now in the context menu/ treeview.[[Image:RAD-ArchivalDesc-Addnew01.png|400px|right|thumb|RAD - view archival description]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If the levels need to be changed. From within the context menu, logged-in users with permission can re-arrange child level descriptions (e.g., Series, Files, Items) within the Fonds treeview by simply dragging and dropping the selected resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New child description: OPTION TWO ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]], click the &amp;quot;Add new&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]] at the bottom of the page; this will create a new description that is one [[Glossary#Level of description|level of description]] below the description currently in the [[Glossary#View page|view page]]. When the record is saved, you will be able to see the new [[Glossary#Child record|child records]] in the [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*This approach, lets the logged-in user navigate to the archival description and then add new child levels using the button, instead of editing within the fonds description. Here is an example from an ISAD archival description [[Image:archDescButtonBlock.png|400px|right|thumb|Click the &amp;quot;Add new&amp;quot; button in the button block to create a new child record]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*It is important to note that after clicking on the add new record button, the edit archival description template will appear, but no reference is made to the parent archival fonds. The example shown is using the RAD template, and you can see that the header is &amp;quot;untitled&amp;quot;. Enter appropriate information into the template for the lower-level descriptions, and remember to select the level of description. [[Image:RAD-ArchDesc-Addnew02.png|400px|right|thumb|RAD Archival description edit template for new child level]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Remember to click save once you have completed entering the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*After clicking save, the user is returned to the Archival Description for the fonds level, but the new child-level has been added. You can see this in the RAD example provided. [[Image:RAD-ArchDesc-Addnew03.png|400px|right|thumb|RAD view archival description with new child level]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Duplicate an existing description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# At the bottom of the archival description [[Glossary#edit page|edit page]] click the [[Glossary#Duplicate button|duplicate button]] in the button block to make a duplicate archival description.[[Image:duplicateButtonBlock.png|400px|right|thumb|Click the &amp;quot;Duplicate&amp;quot; button in the button block to make a duplicate descriptive record]]&lt;br /&gt;
# The user is directed to a new screen and can [[Glossary#Edit duplicate|edit the duplicate archival description]], which is an exact duplicate of the original archival description. Before starting the [[Glossary#edit page|edit page]] provides a warning.&lt;br /&gt;
# After editing the duplicate archival description, the user can cancel or save the changes.[[Image:editduplicate.png|400px|right|thumb|Warning shown to user in duplicate record edit page]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Saving the changes creates a new [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Change_password&amp;diff=12675</id>
		<title>Change password</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Change_password&amp;diff=12675"/>
		<updated>2012-06-28T20:52:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Getting started]] &amp;gt; Change password&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can change their own [[Glossary#Password|passwords]]. If a user forgets his or her [[Glossary#Password|password]], the system [[Glossary#Administrator|administrator]] must reset it (see [[manage user accounts]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Image:mainMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Click &amp;quot;my profile&amp;quot; in the upper right-hand corner of the page]]Click the &amp;quot;my profile&amp;quot; link in the [[Glossary#User menu|user menu]] located in the upper right-hand corner of the page&lt;br /&gt;
# ICA-AtoM displays the [[Glossary#User profile|user's profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Image:changePassword.png|500px|right|thumb|Type in the new password]]Enter your new [[Glossary#Password|password]] under &amp;quot;Change password&amp;quot; and enter it again under &amp;quot;Confirm password&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=File:AtoM_admin_area.png&amp;diff=12674</id>
		<title>File:AtoM admin area.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=File:AtoM_admin_area.png&amp;diff=12674"/>
		<updated>2012-06-28T20:44:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: Screen shot of the Administration area in AtoM&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Screen shot of the Administration area in AtoM&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&amp;diff=12673</id>
		<title>Glossary</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&amp;diff=12673"/>
		<updated>2012-06-28T20:43:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Admin menu */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== About page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Accession record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The accession record is an administrative and descriptive document that summarizes standard information about the process of transferring materials to a repository, including information about the provenance, contents and legal and physical transfer of the records such as, rights and restrictions. See [[Entity types]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An access point is &amp;quot;A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description.&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access privilege ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[User roles]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only logged-in users can see the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add new button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Admin menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[Administer]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administration area ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AtoM_admin_area.png|500px|right|thumb|Administration area]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Administration area is part of the resource description edit template. It allows the User to change the publication status of the resource - Draft (this resource description is not available for public viewing) and Published (this resource description is available for public viewing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administrator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[User roles]] and [[Administer]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Advanced search ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:advsearch_options.png|400px|right|thumb|Advanced search screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The advanced search is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The advanced search hyperlink is located over the main search box on the ICA-AtoM home page. The user can select &amp;quot;and, or, not&amp;quot; operators, search term or phrase, and specific fields to create a powerful search query. The option to apply filters to limit or narrow the search are provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[Entity types]] and [[Add/edit archival descriptions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival institution ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An archival institution is &amp;quot;An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public&amp;quot; (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[Add/edit archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival unit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Authority record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as &amp;quot;The authorized form of name combined with other information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records.&amp;quot; See [[Entity types]] and [[Add/edit authority records]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Browse menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of filter, such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Button block ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button block allows authorized users to add, delete, move and duplicate content and to save or cancel changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Child record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Collection ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ISAD, a collection is &amp;quot;[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds.&amp;quot; In Rules for Archival Description, it is &amp;quot;[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic.&amp;quot; In Dublin Core, a collection is &amp;quot;[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Column header ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[Page types#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Context menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:context.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[Context menu]]. In the context menu, logged-in users with permission can re-arrange child level descriptions (e.g., Series, Files, Items) within the Fonds treeview by simply dragging and dropping the selected resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contributor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Controlled vocabulary ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cover flow ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[wikipedia:Cover flow|Cover flow]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allows the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A creator is &amp;quot;Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity&amp;quot; (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|Context area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Data element ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Database content ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Deaccession Record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The deaccession record is used to indicate that a repository has removed an accession, in part or whole, from the collection. Instead of deleting an [[Glossary#Accession record|accession record]], the repository will create a deaccession record that is kept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default content ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[Choose language]] and [[Translate]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Developer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Digital object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[Upload digital objects]] and [[File formats]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Donor dialog==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:donordialog.png|400px|right|thumb| donor dialog for data entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dialog that opens when adding donor contact information to the accession record or when selecting to edit an existing donor record. Donor records are located under the &amp;quot;Manage&amp;quot; tab in the menu. Donor records are only available to logged-in users with permissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Draft record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Drop-down menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A drop-down list menu is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Duplicate button ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:duplicateButtonBlock.png|500px|right|thumb|Click the &amp;quot;Duplicate&amp;quot; button in the button block to make a duplicate descriptive record]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The duplicate button appears at the bottom of the [[#View page|view page]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit duplicate|edit duplicate]]; this page is an [[#Edit page|edit page]] that is pre-populated with the existing data from the original record. The user can edit the duplicate record page and then save it as a new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit duplicate ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editduplicate.png|500px|right|thumb|Warning shown to user in duplicate record edit page]]&lt;br /&gt;
After the user clicks the [[#duplicate button|duplicate button]] the [[#Edit page|edit page]] provides a warning. The user is now editing a duplicate record (automatically draft status). After editing the duplicate record the user can click the cancel or save button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title bar|title bar]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record, e.g. to edit the &amp;quot;Administrative/biographical history&amp;quot; in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify, or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit pages allow users to add, edit and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, add, edit and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entity ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[Entity types]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Error message ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Event ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person, or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the context area of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[Entity types]] and [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field label ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding Aid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM the View archival description screen can be printed and printed and saved as a Finding Aid in pdf. The finding aid is a tool for discovering information about the fonds or collection. The creation of a finding aid provides the repository physical and intellectual control over the archival records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fonds ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as &amp;quot;The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions.&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[User interface labels]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Function ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF). See [[Entity types]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Global search/replace ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GlobalSearchReplaceGlossary.png|500px|right|thumb|Global search/replace]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Global search and replace allows administrators to query the entire database and globally replace specific terms in each field: title, alternate title, scope and content, bio/admin history etc...(see drop-down for full listing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Holdings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[ISAD#Context area|Context area]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Home page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the &amp;quot;Home&amp;quot; link on the [[#User menu|user menu]] or by clicking the [[#Site logo|site logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Information area ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Information object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An information object is another term for an [[#Archival description|archival description]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Language menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[Choose language]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Level of description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The level of description is &amp;quot;the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the &amp;quot;Identity&amp;quot; area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[ISAD#Identity area|Identity area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Master digital object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the media type [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multi-repository system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multi-value field ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Name ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons, and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]]. See [[ISAD#Access points|access points]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Page title ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says &amp;quot;View Archival institution&amp;quot; is the page title]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing; for example, it indicates whether [[#Accession record|accession records]], [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]] or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]] or an [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Parent record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit. For example, a fonds may be the parent record of a series.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Password ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to add, edit, or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[Manage user accounts#Add a new user|add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[Change password]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Physical storage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LinkPhysicalStorage.png|400px|right|thumb|Physical Storage]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves, and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects by clicking on the &amp;quot;Link physical storage&amp;quot; button in the [[#Button block|button block]] of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[Physical storage]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print Icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PrinterIcon.png|400px|right|thumb|Print Icon]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An icon of a printer is located in the title bar of the View Physical storage and Search/Advanced Search results screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Published record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArchDescPublish.png|right|thumb|500px|Select Publish]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; e.g. when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child records]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not logged in can view them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reference display copy ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the digital object area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Report Icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReportIcon.png|500px|right|thumb| Report Icon in title bar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM a report icon can be found in the title bar of the View archival description screen. Clicking on the report icon takes the user to a Reports screen and the choice of printing 3 different reports: File list, Item list or Physical storage locations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Researcher ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rights record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM Rights records can be linked to [[#Accession record|accession records]], [[#Archival descriptions|archival descriptions]] and [[#Digital objects|digital objects.]] ICA-AtoM Rights metadata elements use [http://www.loc.gov/standards/premis/ PREMIS rights elements]. In ICA-AtoM restrictions can be based on Copyright(s), License, Statute(s) and Policy. For a full explanation see [[Add/edit rights]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search box ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located over the [[#Main menu|main menu]] on all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[Access content]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[Settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading &amp;quot;Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia&amp;quot;. Note use of Columbia theme (see [[Themes]]).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[Themes]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site logo ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired: see [[Site logo]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site title ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading &amp;quot;New Caledonia Archives&amp;quot;. Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Site logo|site logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[Themes]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SKOS ==&lt;br /&gt;
Simple Knowledge Organization System (SKOS) is a data standard model developed by the [http://www.w3.org/ World Wide Web Consortium] (W3C) as a common data model &amp;quot;for expressing the basic structure and content of concept schemes such as thesauri, classification schemes, subject heading lists, taxonomies, folksonomies, and other similar types of controlled vocabulary.&amp;quot; [http://www.w3.org/TR/2009/NOTE-skos-primer-20090818/ (W3C SKOS Primer, 18 August 2009)]. It is used in ICA-AtoM to import and export hierarchical [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. See: [https://www.ica-atom.org/doc/Export_descriptions_and_terms export descriptions and terms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Static page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[Page types#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Subject ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Supported language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxonomy ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Term ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the &amp;quot;Term&amp;quot; item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Thumbnail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed in search and browse results and in [[#Cover flow|cover flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Title bar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading &amp;quot;Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Functions|functions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tooltips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:tooltips.png|500px|right|thumb|Tooltip text in an archival description edit page (the blue box on the right)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tooltips are online text designed to assist users to enter data in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Tooltip text is derived from the standards on which the edit templates are based. Note that administrators can tooltips on or off issue 2338 - see [[Global settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translation bar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on &amp;quot;Translate user interface&amp;quot; in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[Translate interface]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translation panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[Translate interface]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User account ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to add, edit, delete, or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[Manage user accounts]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User interface ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title bar|title bar]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]], and [[#Field label|field labels]], and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, edit, and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[User interface labels]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not logged in)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Username ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[Manage user accounts]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User profile ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage user accounts]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#User menu|user menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User role ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[User roles]] and [[Manage user accounts#Add a new group|Add a new group]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Value list ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Function|functions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Page_types&amp;diff=12672</id>
		<title>Page types</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Page_types&amp;diff=12672"/>
		<updated>2012-06-28T20:38:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Edit */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Getting started]] &amp;gt; Page types&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section describes the main page types users of ICA-AtoM will encounter. [[Glossary#Page title|Page titles]] throughout the system indicate the type of page being displayed. The main page types are:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[#Home page|Home page]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[#View|View]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[#Edit|Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[#Search results|Search results]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[#Browse results|Browse results]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[#Error|Error]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Home page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:homePage_1.png|500px|right|thumb|Home page: user is logged in]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Glossary#Home page|home page]] is the first page the user sees when opening the application. It provides basic information about the application and links and buttons for user actions (search, browse, log in, log out, get help, switch language). When the user logs in, the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] becomes visible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Glossary#Home page|home page]] is accessible from any other page by clicking the [[Glossary#Site title|site title]], the [[Glossary#Site logo|site logo]] or the &amp;quot;home&amp;quot; link in the [[Glossary#User menu|user menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A [[Glossary#View page|view page]] displays an individual record in full in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]], showing only those [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that contain data. Logged in users can toggle between [[Glossary#Edit mode|edit mode]] and [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]] by clicking the [[Glossary#Title bar|title bar]] and can also use the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]] to edit or add to the record (i.e. to upload [[Glossary#Digital object|digital objects]], add [[Glossary#Physical storage|physical storage]], etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editPage.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival description]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Displays an individual record in [[Glossary#Edit mode|edit mode]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
* Shows all [[Glossary#Field|fields]], including the [[Glossary#Administration area|administration area]].&lt;br /&gt;
* Groups [[Glossary#Field|fields]] by collapsible [[Glossary#Information area|information areas]]: [[Glossary#Field|fields]] can be hidden or displayed by section.&lt;br /&gt;
* Provides [[Glossary#Button block|button block]] that contains buttons for saving or canceling changes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Accessible to [[Glossary#Contributor|contributors]], [[Glossary#Editor|editors]], and [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]]; not accessible to [[Glossary#Researcher|researchers]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search results ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:searchResults.png|500px|right|thumb|Search results page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A search results page displays set of records that match search criteria. Users can click on a title to open the record in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Browse results ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseResults.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse results page; user is browsing authority records. Note browse menu directly below search box.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browse results show lists of descriptions retrieved by clicking on an item in the [[Glossary#Browse menu|browse menu]]. By default, results for [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]], [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] and [[Glossary#Function|function]] are sorted by most recently updated; however, the user can select alphabetic sort if desired. Users can also browse by [[Glossary#Subject|subject]], [[Glossary#Place|place]], and [[Glossary#Digital object|digital object]] type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Error ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An [[Glossary#Error message|error message]] displays when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. The following are typical types of [[Glossary#Error message|error messages]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page not found: broken link, report to system [[Glossary#Administrator|administrator]] and to ICA-AtoM support team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No access permission: your [[Glossary#User account|user account]] does not give you [[Glossary#Access privilege|access privileges]] to the requested page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Locked term: [[Glossary#Term|term]] cannot be edited because it is referenced in the underlying code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No translation permission: you do not have [[Glossary#Translator|translator]] access in the current language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
System error (error 500): indicates a fairly major system-wide problem, or problem with data corruption; report to [[Glossary#Administrator|administrator]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blank page: indicates a fairly major system-wide problem, or problem with data corruption; report to [[Glossary#Administrator|administrator]] and to ICA-AtoM support team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Term_data_entry&amp;diff=12599</id>
		<title>Term data entry</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Term_data_entry&amp;diff=12599"/>
		<updated>2012-05-31T21:03:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Term data entry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Definition area ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Taxonomy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This [[Glossary#Field|field]] is completed automatically according to the name of the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] to which the [[Glossary#Term|term]] belongs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Name ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the [[Glossary#Term|term]] as you would like to see it appear in value lists in [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] and as labels in [[Glossary#View page|view page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Use for ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create one or more non-preferred [[Glossary#Term|terms]] using this [[Glossary#Field|field]]. When users attempt to add the non-preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]] to a record the preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be added instead. Similarly, if users search on the non-preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]], ICA-AtoM will automatically substitute the preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:code_field_vancouver_example.png|500px|right|thumb|An example of a map generated using Google's Static Map API by placing latitudes and longitudes in the Code data entry field.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Code ===&lt;br /&gt;
This field is under development. Currently, it allows [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]] and [[Glossary#Editor|editors]] to add a static [http://maps.google.com/ Google Map] to a Place [[Glossary#Term|term]] description. The field behaves similarly to the search bar on a Google Map, and will generate a static map image based on the term entered using [https://developers.google.com/maps/documentation/staticmaps/ Google's Static Map API.] Terms entered can include addresses, latitude/longitude coordinates, and place names (such as cities, neighborhoods, etc.).  Unlike Google Maps, a pin will not be added to the map to mark the selected location, and currently the user cannot specify the scale of the map generated. At the moment, the map is only viewable through the taxonomy &amp;quot;view term&amp;quot; screen available to administrators and editors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scope note(s) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter descriptive information about the [[Glossary#Term|term]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Source note(s) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the source of the [[Glossary#Term|term]] if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Display note(s) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter an alternate label for the [[Glossary#Term|term]] if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the current version of ICA-AtoM, this [[Glossary#Field|field]] applies only to the [[Glossary#Event|events]] [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. For example, for the [[Glossary#Term|term]] &amp;quot;distribution&amp;quot; the display note is &amp;quot;distributor&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relationships area ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Hierarchical taxonomies]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=File:Code_field_vancouver_example.png&amp;diff=12598</id>
		<title>File:Code field vancouver example.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=File:Code_field_vancouver_example.png&amp;diff=12598"/>
		<updated>2012-05-31T21:02:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: Example of the use of the code field in ICA-AtoM (Build 1.3)'s Manage Taxonomies. Generated for Vancouver using latitude and longitude coordinates as an example for the ICA-AtoM user's guide, May 31st 2012 by Dan Gillean, professional experience studen...&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Example of the use of the code field in ICA-AtoM (Build 1.3)'s Manage Taxonomies. Generated for Vancouver using latitude and longitude coordinates as an example for the ICA-AtoM user's guide, May 31st 2012 by Dan Gillean, professional experience student at Artefactual.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Term_data_entry&amp;diff=12597</id>
		<title>Term data entry</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Term_data_entry&amp;diff=12597"/>
		<updated>2012-05-31T20:59:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Code */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Term data entry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Definition area ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Taxonomy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This [[Glossary#Field|field]] is completed automatically according to the name of the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] to which the [[Glossary#Term|term]] belongs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Name ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the [[Glossary#Term|term]] as you would like to see it appear in value lists in [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] and as labels in [[Glossary#View page|view page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Use for ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create one or more non-preferred [[Glossary#Term|terms]] using this [[Glossary#Field|field]]. When users attempt to add the non-preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]] to a record the preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be added instead. Similarly, if users search on the non-preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]], ICA-AtoM will automatically substitute the preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Code ===&lt;br /&gt;
This field is under development. Currently, it allows [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]] and [[Glossary#Editor|editors]] to add a static [http://maps.google.com/ Google Map] to a Place [[Glossary#Term|term]] description. The field behaves similarly to the search bar on a Google Map, and will generate a static map image based on the term entered using [https://developers.google.com/maps/documentation/staticmaps/ Google's Static Map API.] Terms entered can include addresses, latitude/longitude coordinates, and place names (such as cities, neighborhoods, etc.).  Unlike Google Maps, a pin will not be added to the map to mark the selected location, and currently the user cannot specify the scale of the map generated. At the moment, the map is only viewable through the taxonomy &amp;quot;view term&amp;quot; screen available to administrators and editors.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:code_field_vancouver_example.png|500px|right|thumb|An example of a map generated using Google's Static Map API by placing latitudes and longitudes in the Code data entry field.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scope note(s) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter descriptive information about the [[Glossary#Term|term]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Source note(s) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the source of the [[Glossary#Term|term]] if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Display note(s) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter an alternate label for the [[Glossary#Term|term]] if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the current version of ICA-AtoM, this [[Glossary#Field|field]] applies only to the [[Glossary#Event|events]] [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. For example, for the [[Glossary#Term|term]] &amp;quot;distribution&amp;quot; the display note is &amp;quot;distributor&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relationships area ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Hierarchical taxonomies]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12596</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12596"/>
		<updated>2012-05-31T20:56:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Adding Access points to archival descriptions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== From the Manage Taxonomy Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adding Access points to archival descriptions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Names, Places, and Subject [[Glossary#Access point|access points]] are a way of associating specific  terms contained or referenced within an information object (e.g. items within a file; a video; a picture) to its archival description, and creating searchable entry points for users. They can be conceptualized as similar to &amp;quot;tags&amp;quot; and help contextualize information objects while returning better search results. In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. Like other taxonomies and authority records in ICA-AtoM, these can be preloaded by administrators by importing [[Glossary#SKOS|SKOS]] XML files with predefined [[Glossary#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]] and relationships, but they can also be created on the fly by users.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Adding Access points &amp;quot;on the fly&amp;quot; from archival descriptions screen:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly (without leaving an archival description) from the [https://www.ica-atom.org/doc/Add/edit_archival_descriptions add/edit archival descriptions] screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points'' area.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:accesspoints.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter a name, place, or subject on the fly from an archival description]] Any terms previously created and any access point taxonomies already imported into ICA-AtoM will populate a the drop-down menu when a user places the cursor in the field, to ensure that [[Glossary#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] terms are maintained, but multiple new terms can also be added. However, if a hierarchical relationship is to be established between terms (for example, nesting &amp;quot;Mount Pleasant&amp;quot; as a narrower term of &amp;quot;Vancouver&amp;quot;), an [[Glossary#Administrator|administrator]] or [[Glossary#Editor|editor]] will have to edit the term through the taxonomies list.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;To add Access points from the taxonomies edit screen, follow the steps at the top of this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Term_data_entry&amp;diff=12595</id>
		<title>Term data entry</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Term_data_entry&amp;diff=12595"/>
		<updated>2012-05-31T20:53:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Code */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Term data entry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Definition area ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Taxonomy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This [[Glossary#Field|field]] is completed automatically according to the name of the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] to which the [[Glossary#Term|term]] belongs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Name ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the [[Glossary#Term|term]] as you would like to see it appear in value lists in [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] and as labels in [[Glossary#View page|view page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Use for ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create one or more non-preferred [[Glossary#Term|terms]] using this [[Glossary#Field|field]]. When users attempt to add the non-preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]] to a record the preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be added instead. Similarly, if users search on the non-preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]], ICA-AtoM will automatically substitute the preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Code ===&lt;br /&gt;
This field is under development. Currently, it allows [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]] and [[Glossary#Editor|editors]] to add a static [http://maps.google.com/ Google Map] to a Place [[Glossary#Term|term]] description. The field behaves similarly to the search bar on a Google Map, and will generate a static map image based on the term entered using [https://developers.google.com/maps/documentation/staticmaps/ Google's Static Map API.] Terms entered can include addresses, latitude/longitude coordinates, and place names (such as cities, neighborhoods, etc.).  Unlike Google Maps, a pin will not be added to the map to mark the selected location, and currently the user cannot specify the scale of the map generated. At the moment, the map is only viewable through the taxonomy &amp;quot;view term&amp;quot; screen available to administrators and editors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scope note(s) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter descriptive information about the [[Glossary#Term|term]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Source note(s) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the source of the [[Glossary#Term|term]] if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Display note(s) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter an alternate label for the [[Glossary#Term|term]] if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the current version of ICA-AtoM, this [[Glossary#Field|field]] applies only to the [[Glossary#Event|events]] [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. For example, for the [[Glossary#Term|term]] &amp;quot;distribution&amp;quot; the display note is &amp;quot;distributor&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relationships area ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Hierarchical taxonomies]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Term_data_entry&amp;diff=12594</id>
		<title>Term data entry</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Term_data_entry&amp;diff=12594"/>
		<updated>2012-05-31T20:37:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Code */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Term data entry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Definition area ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Taxonomy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This [[Glossary#Field|field]] is completed automatically according to the name of the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] to which the [[Glossary#Term|term]] belongs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Name ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the [[Glossary#Term|term]] as you would like to see it appear in value lists in [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] and as labels in [[Glossary#View page|view page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Use for ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create one or more non-preferred [[Glossary#Term|terms]] using this [[Glossary#Field|field]]. When users attempt to add the non-preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]] to a record the preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be added instead. Similarly, if users search on the non-preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]], ICA-AtoM will automatically substitute the preferred [[Glossary#Term|term]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Code ===&lt;br /&gt;
'''PROPOSED NEW TEXT:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This field is under development. Currently, it allows [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]] and [[Glossary#Editor|editors]] to add a static [http://maps.google.com/ Google Map]] to a Place [[Glossary#Term|term]] description. The field behaves similarly to the search bar on a Google Map, and will generate a static map image based on the term entered using [https://developers.google.com/maps/documentation/staticmaps/ Google's Static Map API]. Terms entered can include addresses, latitude/longitude coordinates, and place names (such as cities, neighborhoods, etc.).  Unlike Google Maps, a pin will not be added to the map to mark the selected location, and currently the user cannot specify the scale of the map generated. At the moment, the map is only viewable through the taxonomy &amp;quot;view term&amp;quot; screen available to administrators and editors.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''OLD TEXT (about to be removed):'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any alphanumeric codes that are used to identify the [[Glossary#Term|term]] based on institutional practices or other standards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scope note(s) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter descriptive information about the [[Glossary#Term|term]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Source note(s) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the source of the [[Glossary#Term|term]] if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Display note(s) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter an alternate label for the [[Glossary#Term|term]] if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the current version of ICA-AtoM, this [[Glossary#Field|field]] applies only to the [[Glossary#Event|events]] [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. For example, for the [[Glossary#Term|term]] &amp;quot;distribution&amp;quot; the display note is &amp;quot;distributor&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relationships area ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Hierarchical taxonomies]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12593</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12593"/>
		<updated>2012-05-31T18:57:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Adding Access points to archival descriptions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== From the Manage Taxonomy Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adding Access points to archival descriptions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Names, Places, and Subject [[Glossary#Access point|access points]] are a way of associating specific  terms contained or referenced within an information object (e.g. items within a file; a video; a picture)to its archival description, and creating searchable entry points for users. They can be conceptualized as similar to &amp;quot;tags&amp;quot; and help contextualize information objects while returning better search results. In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. Like other taxonomies and authority records in ICA-AtoM, these can be preloaded by administrators by importing [[Glossary#SKOS|SKOS]] XML files with predefined [[Glossary#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]] and relationships, but they can also be created on the fly by users.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Adding Access points &amp;quot;on the fly&amp;quot; from archival descriptions screen:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly (without leaving an archival description) from the [https://www.ica-atom.org/doc/Add/edit_archival_descriptions add/edit archival descriptions] screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points'' area.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:accesspoints.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter a name, place, or subject on the fly from an archival description]] Any terms previously created and any access point taxonomies already imported into ICA-AtoM will populate a the drop-down menu when a user places the cursor in the field, to ensure that [[Glossary#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] terms are maintained, but multiple new terms can also be added. However, if a hierarchical relationship is to be established between terms (for example, nesting &amp;quot;Mount Pleasant&amp;quot; as a narrower term of &amp;quot;Vancouver&amp;quot;), an administrator will have to edit the term through the taxonomies list.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;To add Access points from the taxonomies edit screen, follow the steps at the top of this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12592</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12592"/>
		<updated>2012-05-31T18:47:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Adding Access points to archival descriptions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== From the Manage Taxonomy Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adding Access points to archival descriptions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Names, Places, and Subject [[Glossary#Access point|access points]] are a way of associating specific  terms contained or referenced within an information object (e.g. items within a file; a video; a picture)to its archival description, and creating searchable entry points for users. They can be conceptualized as similar to &amp;quot;tags&amp;quot; and help contextualize information objects while returning better search results. In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and [[Glossary#Taxonomy|]]taxonomies created and customized by users. Like other taxonomies and authority records in ICA-AtoM, these can be preloaded by administrators by importing [[Glossary#SKOS|SKOS]] XML files with predefined [[Glossary#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]] and relationships, but they can also be created on the fly by users.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Adding Access points &amp;quot;on the fly&amp;quot; from archival descriptions screen'''&lt;br /&gt;
[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly (without leaving an archival description) from the [https://www.ica-atom.org/doc/Add/edit_archival_descriptions add/edit archival descriptions] screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points'' area.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:accesspoints.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter a name, place, or subject on the fly from an archival description]] Any terms previously created and any access point taxonomies already imported into ICA-AtoM will populate a the drop-down menu when a user places the cursor in the field, to ensure that [[Glossary#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] terms are maintained, but multiple new terms can also be added. However, if a hierarchical relationship is to be established between terms (for example, nesting &amp;quot;Mount Pleasant&amp;quot; as a narrower term of &amp;quot;Vancouver&amp;quot;), an administrator will have to edit the term through the taxonomies list.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;To add Access points from the taxonomies edit screen, follow the steps at the top of this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12591</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12591"/>
		<updated>2012-05-31T18:05:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== From the Manage Taxonomy Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adding Access points to archival descriptions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Names, Places, and Subject [[Glossary#Access point|access points]] are a way of associating specific  terms contained or referenced within an information object (e.g. items within a file; a video; a picture)to its archival description, and creating searchable entry points for users. They can be conceptualized as similar to &amp;quot;tags&amp;quot; and help contextualize information objects while returning better search results. In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and [[Glossary#Taxonomy|]]taxonomies created and customized by users. Like other taxonomies and authority records in ICA-AtoM, these can be preloaded by administrators by importing [[Glossary#SKOS|SKOS]] XML files with predefined [[Glossary#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]] and relationships, but they can also be created on the fly by users.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Adding Access points &amp;quot;on the fly&amp;quot; from archival descriptions screen'''&lt;br /&gt;
[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly (without leaving an archival description) from the [https://www.ica-atom.org/doc/Add/edit_archival_descriptions add/edit archival descriptions] screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points'' area.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:accesspoints.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter a name, place, or subject on the fly from an archival description]] Any terms previously created and any access point taxonomies already imported into ICA-AtoM will populate a the drop-down menu when a user places the cursor in the field, to ensure that [[Glossary#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] terms are maintained, but multiple new terms can also be added. However, if a hierarchical relationship is to be established between terms (for example, nesting &amp;quot;Mount Pleasant&amp;quot; as a narrower term of &amp;quot;Vancouver&amp;quot;), an administrator will have to edit the term through the taxonomies list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Example - Adding a Place access point to archival descriptions through the taxonomies list:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Follow step 1 above, and navigate to &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; in the Taxonomies list&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new place [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12590</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12590"/>
		<updated>2012-05-31T17:56:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== From the Manage Taxonomy Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adding Access points to archival descriptions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Names, Places, and Subject [[Glossary#Access point|access points]] are a way of associating specific  terms contained or referenced within an information object (e.g. items within a file; a video; a picture)to its archival description, and creating searchable entry points for users. They can be conceptualized as similar to &amp;quot;tags&amp;quot; and help contextualize information objects while returning better search results. In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and [[Glossary#Taxonomy|]]taxonomies created and customized by users. Like other taxonomies and authority records in ICA-AtoM, these can be preloaded by administrators by importing [[Glossary#SKOS|SKOS]] XML files with predefined [[Glossary#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]] and relationships, but they can also be created on the fly by users.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adding Access points &amp;quot;on the fly&amp;quot; from archival descriptions screen===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly (without leaving an archival description) from the [https://www.ica-atom.org/doc/Add/edit_archival_descriptions add/edit archival descriptions] screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points'' area.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:accesspoints.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter a name, place, or subject on the fly]] Any terms previously created and any access point taxonomies already imported into ICA-AtoM will populate a the drop-down menu when a user places the cursor in the field, to ensure that [[Glossary#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] terms are maintained, but multiple new terms can also be added. However, if a hierarchical relationship is to be established between terms (for example, nesting &amp;quot;Mount Pleasant&amp;quot; under &amp;quot;Vancouver&amp;quot;), an user with administrator privileges will have to edit the term through the taxonomies list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Example - Adding a Place access point to archival descriptions through the taxonomies list:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Follow step 1 above, and navigate to &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; in the Taxonomies list&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new place [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12589</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12589"/>
		<updated>2012-05-31T17:39:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Adding Access points to archival descriptions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== On the Fly from archival descriptions screen===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly from the [https://www.ica-atom.org/doc/Add/edit_archival_descriptions add/edit archival descriptions] screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points'' area.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:accesspoints.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter a name, place, or subject on the fly]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== From the Manage Taxonomy Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adding Access points to archival descriptions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Names, Places, and Subject [[Glossary#Access point|access points]] are a way of associating specific  terms contained or referenced within an information object (e.g. items within a file; a video; a picture)to its archival description, and creating searchable entry points for users. They can be conceptualized as similar to &amp;quot;tags&amp;quot; and help contextualize information objects while returning better search results. In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and [[Glossary#Taxonomy|]]taxonomies created and customized by users. Like other taxonomies and authority records in ICA-AtoM, these can be preloaded by administrators by importing [[Glossary#SKOS|SKOS]] XML files with predefined vocabularies and relationships, but they can also be created on the fly by users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Example - Adding a Place access point to archival descriptions through the taxonomies list:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Follow step 1 above, and navigate to &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; in the Taxonomies list&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new place [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&amp;diff=12588</id>
		<title>Glossary</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&amp;diff=12588"/>
		<updated>2012-05-31T17:35:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* SKOS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== About page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Accession record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The accession record is an administrative and descriptive document that summarizes standard information about the process of transferring materials to a repository, including information about the provenance, contents and legal and physical transfer of the records such as, rights and restrictions. See [[Entity types]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An access point is &amp;quot;A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description.&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access privilege ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[User roles]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only logged-in users can see the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add new button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Admin menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[Administer]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administrator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[User roles]] and [[Administer]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Advanced search ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:advsearch_options.png|400px|right|thumb|Advanced search screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The advanced search is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The advanced search hyperlink is located over the main search box on the ICA-AtoM home page. The user can select &amp;quot;and, or, not&amp;quot; operators, search term or phrase, and specific fields to create a powerful search query. The option to apply filters to limit or narrow the search are provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[Entity types]] and [[Add/edit archival descriptions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival institution ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An archival institution is &amp;quot;An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public&amp;quot; (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[Add/edit archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival unit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Authority record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as &amp;quot;The authorized form of name combined with other information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records.&amp;quot; See [[Entity types]] and [[Add/edit authority records]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Browse menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of filter, such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Button block ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button block allows authorized users to add, delete, move and duplicate content and to save or cancel changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Child record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Collection ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ISAD, a collection is &amp;quot;[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds.&amp;quot; In Rules for Archival Description, it is &amp;quot;[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic.&amp;quot; In Dublin Core, a collection is &amp;quot;[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Column header ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[Page types#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Context menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:context.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[Context menu]]. In the context menu, logged-in users with permission can re-arrange child level descriptions (e.g., Series, Files, Items) within the Fonds treeview by simply dragging and dropping the selected resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contributor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Controlled vocabulary ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cover flow ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[wikipedia:Cover flow|Cover flow]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allows the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A creator is &amp;quot;Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity&amp;quot; (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|Context area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Data element ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Database content ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Deaccession Record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The deaccession record is used to indicate that a repository has removed an accession, in part or whole, from the collection. Instead of deleting an [[Glossary#Accession record|accession record]], the repository will create a deaccession record that is kept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default content ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[Choose language]] and [[Translate]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Developer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Digital object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[Upload digital objects]] and [[File formats]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Donor dialog==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:donordialog.png|400px|right|thumb| donor dialog for data entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dialog that opens when adding donor contact information to the accession record or when selecting to edit an existing donor record. Donor records are located under the &amp;quot;Manage&amp;quot; tab in the menu. Donor records are only available to logged-in users with permissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Draft record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Drop-down menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A drop-down list menu is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Duplicate button ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:duplicateButtonBlock.png|500px|right|thumb|Click the &amp;quot;Duplicate&amp;quot; button in the button block to make a duplicate descriptive record]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The duplicate button appears at the bottom of the [[#View page|view page]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit duplicate|edit duplicate]]; this page is an [[#Edit page|edit page]] that is pre-populated with the existing data from the original record. The user can edit the duplicate record page and then save it as a new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit duplicate ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editduplicate.png|500px|right|thumb|Warning shown to user in duplicate record edit page]]&lt;br /&gt;
After the user clicks the [[#duplicate button|duplicate button]] the [[#Edit page|edit page]] provides a warning. The user is now editing a duplicate record (automatically draft status). After editing the duplicate record the user can click the cancel or save button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title bar|title bar]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record, e.g. to edit the &amp;quot;Administrative/biographical history&amp;quot; in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify, or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit pages allow users to add, edit and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, add, edit and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entity ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[Entity types]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Error message ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Event ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person, or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the context area of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[Entity types]] and [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field label ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding Aid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM the View archival description screen can be printed and printed and saved as a Finding Aid in pdf. The finding aid is a tool for discovering information about the fonds or collection. The creation of a finding aid provides the repository physical and intellectual control over the archival records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fonds ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as &amp;quot;The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions.&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[User interface labels]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Function ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF). See [[Entity types]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Global search/replace ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GlobalSearchReplaceGlossary.png|500px|right|thumb|Global search/replace]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Global search and replace allows administrators to query the entire database and globally replace specific terms in each field: title, alternate title, scope and content, bio/admin history etc...(see drop-down for full listing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Holdings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[ISAD#Context area|Context area]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Home page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the &amp;quot;Home&amp;quot; link on the [[#User menu|user menu]] or by clicking the [[#Site logo|site logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Information area ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Information object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An information object is another term for an [[#Archival description|archival description]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Language menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[Choose language]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Level of description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The level of description is &amp;quot;the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the &amp;quot;Identity&amp;quot; area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[ISAD#Identity area|Identity area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Master digital object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the media type [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multi-repository system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multi-value field ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Name ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons, and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]]. See [[ISAD#Access points|access points]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Page title ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says &amp;quot;View Archival institution&amp;quot; is the page title]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing; for example, it indicates whether [[#Accession record|accession records]], [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]] or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]] or an [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Parent record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit. For example, a fonds may be the parent record of a series.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Password ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to add, edit, or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[Manage user accounts#Add a new user|add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[Change password]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Physical storage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LinkPhysicalStorage.png|400px|right|thumb|Physical Storage]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves, and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects by clicking on the &amp;quot;Link physical storage&amp;quot; button in the [[#Button block|button block]] of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[Physical storage]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print Icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PrinterIcon.png|400px|right|thumb|Print Icon]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An icon of a printer is located in the title bar of the View Physical storage and Search/Advanced Search results screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Published record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArchDescPublish.png|right|thumb|500px|Select Publish]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; e.g. when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child records]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not logged in can view them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reference display copy ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the digital object area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Report Icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReportIcon.png|500px|right|thumb| Report Icon in title bar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM a report icon can be found in the title bar of the View archival description screen. Clicking on the report icon takes the user to a Reports screen and the choice of printing 3 different reports: File list, Item list or Physical storage locations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Researcher ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rights record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM Rights records can be linked to [[#Accession record|accession records]], [[#Archival descriptions|archival descriptions]] and [[#Digital objects|digital objects.]] ICA-AtoM Rights metadata elements use [http://www.loc.gov/standards/premis/ PREMIS rights elements]. In ICA-AtoM restrictions can be based on Copyright(s), License, Statute(s) and Policy. For a full explanation see [[Add/edit rights]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search box ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located over the [[#Main menu|main menu]] on all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[Access content]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[Settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading &amp;quot;Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia&amp;quot;. Note use of Columbia theme (see [[Themes]]).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[Themes]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site logo ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired: see [[Site logo]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site title ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading &amp;quot;New Caledonia Archives&amp;quot;. Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Site logo|site logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[Themes]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SKOS ==&lt;br /&gt;
Simple Knowledge Organization System (SKOS) is a data standard model developed by the [http://www.w3.org/ World Wide Web Consortium] (W3C) as a common data model &amp;quot;for expressing the basic structure and content of concept schemes such as thesauri, classification schemes, subject heading lists, taxonomies, folksonomies, and other similar types of controlled vocabulary.&amp;quot; [http://www.w3.org/TR/2009/NOTE-skos-primer-20090818/ (W3C SKOS Primer, 18 August 2009)]. It is used in ICA-AtoM to import and export hierarchical [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. See: [https://www.ica-atom.org/doc/Export_descriptions_and_terms export descriptions and terms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Static page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[Page types#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Subject ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Supported language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxonomy ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Term ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the &amp;quot;Term&amp;quot; item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Thumbnail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed in search and browse results and in [[#Cover flow|cover flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Title bar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading &amp;quot;Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Functions|functions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tooltips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:tooltips.png|500px|right|thumb|Tooltip text in an archival description edit page (the blue box on the right)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tooltips are online text designed to assist users to enter data in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Tooltip text is derived from the standards on which the edit templates are based. Note that administrators can tooltips on or off issue 2338 - see [[Global settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translation bar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on &amp;quot;Translate user interface&amp;quot; in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[Translate interface]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translation panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[Translate interface]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User account ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to add, edit, delete, or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[Manage user accounts]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User interface ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title bar|title bar]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]], and [[#Field label|field labels]], and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, edit, and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[User interface labels]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not logged in)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Username ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[Manage user accounts]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User profile ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage user accounts]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#User menu|user menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User role ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[User roles]] and [[Manage user accounts#Add a new group|Add a new group]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Value list ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Function|functions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&amp;diff=12587</id>
		<title>Glossary</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&amp;diff=12587"/>
		<updated>2012-05-31T17:33:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Site title */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== About page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Accession record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The accession record is an administrative and descriptive document that summarizes standard information about the process of transferring materials to a repository, including information about the provenance, contents and legal and physical transfer of the records such as, rights and restrictions. See [[Entity types]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An access point is &amp;quot;A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description.&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access privilege ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[User roles]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only logged-in users can see the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add new button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Admin menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[Administer]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administrator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[User roles]] and [[Administer]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Advanced search ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:advsearch_options.png|400px|right|thumb|Advanced search screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The advanced search is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The advanced search hyperlink is located over the main search box on the ICA-AtoM home page. The user can select &amp;quot;and, or, not&amp;quot; operators, search term or phrase, and specific fields to create a powerful search query. The option to apply filters to limit or narrow the search are provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[Entity types]] and [[Add/edit archival descriptions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival institution ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An archival institution is &amp;quot;An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public&amp;quot; (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[Add/edit archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival unit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Authority record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as &amp;quot;The authorized form of name combined with other information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records.&amp;quot; See [[Entity types]] and [[Add/edit authority records]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Browse menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of filter, such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Button block ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button block allows authorized users to add, delete, move and duplicate content and to save or cancel changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Child record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Collection ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ISAD, a collection is &amp;quot;[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds.&amp;quot; In Rules for Archival Description, it is &amp;quot;[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic.&amp;quot; In Dublin Core, a collection is &amp;quot;[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Column header ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[Page types#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Context menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:context.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[Context menu]]. In the context menu, logged-in users with permission can re-arrange child level descriptions (e.g., Series, Files, Items) within the Fonds treeview by simply dragging and dropping the selected resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contributor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Controlled vocabulary ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cover flow ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[wikipedia:Cover flow|Cover flow]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allows the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A creator is &amp;quot;Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity&amp;quot; (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|Context area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Data element ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Database content ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Deaccession Record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The deaccession record is used to indicate that a repository has removed an accession, in part or whole, from the collection. Instead of deleting an [[Glossary#Accession record|accession record]], the repository will create a deaccession record that is kept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default content ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[Choose language]] and [[Translate]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Developer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Digital object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[Upload digital objects]] and [[File formats]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Donor dialog==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:donordialog.png|400px|right|thumb| donor dialog for data entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dialog that opens when adding donor contact information to the accession record or when selecting to edit an existing donor record. Donor records are located under the &amp;quot;Manage&amp;quot; tab in the menu. Donor records are only available to logged-in users with permissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Draft record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Drop-down menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A drop-down list menu is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Duplicate button ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:duplicateButtonBlock.png|500px|right|thumb|Click the &amp;quot;Duplicate&amp;quot; button in the button block to make a duplicate descriptive record]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The duplicate button appears at the bottom of the [[#View page|view page]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit duplicate|edit duplicate]]; this page is an [[#Edit page|edit page]] that is pre-populated with the existing data from the original record. The user can edit the duplicate record page and then save it as a new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit duplicate ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editduplicate.png|500px|right|thumb|Warning shown to user in duplicate record edit page]]&lt;br /&gt;
After the user clicks the [[#duplicate button|duplicate button]] the [[#Edit page|edit page]] provides a warning. The user is now editing a duplicate record (automatically draft status). After editing the duplicate record the user can click the cancel or save button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title bar|title bar]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record, e.g. to edit the &amp;quot;Administrative/biographical history&amp;quot; in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify, or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit pages allow users to add, edit and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, add, edit and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entity ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[Entity types]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Error message ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Event ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person, or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the context area of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[Entity types]] and [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field label ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding Aid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM the View archival description screen can be printed and printed and saved as a Finding Aid in pdf. The finding aid is a tool for discovering information about the fonds or collection. The creation of a finding aid provides the repository physical and intellectual control over the archival records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fonds ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as &amp;quot;The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions.&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[User interface labels]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Function ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF). See [[Entity types]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Global search/replace ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GlobalSearchReplaceGlossary.png|500px|right|thumb|Global search/replace]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Global search and replace allows administrators to query the entire database and globally replace specific terms in each field: title, alternate title, scope and content, bio/admin history etc...(see drop-down for full listing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Holdings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[ISAD#Context area|Context area]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Home page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the &amp;quot;Home&amp;quot; link on the [[#User menu|user menu]] or by clicking the [[#Site logo|site logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Information area ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Information object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An information object is another term for an [[#Archival description|archival description]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Language menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[Choose language]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Level of description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The level of description is &amp;quot;the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the &amp;quot;Identity&amp;quot; area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[ISAD#Identity area|Identity area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Master digital object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the media type [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multi-repository system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multi-value field ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Name ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons, and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]]. See [[ISAD#Access points|access points]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Page title ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says &amp;quot;View Archival institution&amp;quot; is the page title]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing; for example, it indicates whether [[#Accession record|accession records]], [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]] or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]] or an [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Parent record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit. For example, a fonds may be the parent record of a series.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Password ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to add, edit, or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[Manage user accounts#Add a new user|add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[Change password]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Physical storage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LinkPhysicalStorage.png|400px|right|thumb|Physical Storage]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves, and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects by clicking on the &amp;quot;Link physical storage&amp;quot; button in the [[#Button block|button block]] of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[Physical storage]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print Icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PrinterIcon.png|400px|right|thumb|Print Icon]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An icon of a printer is located in the title bar of the View Physical storage and Search/Advanced Search results screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Published record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArchDescPublish.png|right|thumb|500px|Select Publish]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; e.g. when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child records]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not logged in can view them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reference display copy ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the digital object area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Report Icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReportIcon.png|500px|right|thumb| Report Icon in title bar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM a report icon can be found in the title bar of the View archival description screen. Clicking on the report icon takes the user to a Reports screen and the choice of printing 3 different reports: File list, Item list or Physical storage locations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Researcher ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rights record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM Rights records can be linked to [[#Accession record|accession records]], [[#Archival descriptions|archival descriptions]] and [[#Digital objects|digital objects.]] ICA-AtoM Rights metadata elements use [http://www.loc.gov/standards/premis/ PREMIS rights elements]. In ICA-AtoM restrictions can be based on Copyright(s), License, Statute(s) and Policy. For a full explanation see [[Add/edit rights]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search box ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located over the [[#Main menu|main menu]] on all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[Access content]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[Settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading &amp;quot;Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia&amp;quot;. Note use of Columbia theme (see [[Themes]]).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[Themes]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site logo ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired: see [[Site logo]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site title ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading &amp;quot;New Caledonia Archives&amp;quot;. Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Site logo|site logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[Themes]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SKOS ==&lt;br /&gt;
Simple Knowledge Organization System (SKOS) is a data standard model developed by the [http://www.w3.org/ World Wide Web Consortium] (W3C)as a common data model &amp;quot;for expressing the basic structure and content of concept schemes such as thesauri, classification schemes, subject heading lists, taxonomies, folksonomies, and other similar types of controlled vocabulary.&amp;quot; [http://www.w3.org/TR/2009/NOTE-skos-primer-20090818/ (W3C SKOS Primer, 18 August 2009)]. It is used in ICA-AtoM to import and export hierarchical [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. See: [https://www.ica-atom.org/doc/Export_descriptions_and_terms export descriptions and terms]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Static page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[Page types#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Subject ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Supported language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxonomy ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Term ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the &amp;quot;Term&amp;quot; item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Thumbnail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed in search and browse results and in [[#Cover flow|cover flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Title bar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading &amp;quot;Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Functions|functions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tooltips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:tooltips.png|500px|right|thumb|Tooltip text in an archival description edit page (the blue box on the right)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tooltips are online text designed to assist users to enter data in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Tooltip text is derived from the standards on which the edit templates are based. Note that administrators can tooltips on or off issue 2338 - see [[Global settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translation bar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on &amp;quot;Translate user interface&amp;quot; in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[Translate interface]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translation panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[Translate interface]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User account ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to add, edit, delete, or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[Manage user accounts]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User interface ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title bar|title bar]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]], and [[#Field label|field labels]], and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, edit, and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[User interface labels]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not logged in)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Username ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[Manage user accounts]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User profile ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage user accounts]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#User menu|user menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User role ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[User roles]] and [[Manage user accounts#Add a new group|Add a new group]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Value list ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Function|functions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12586</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12586"/>
		<updated>2012-05-31T17:15:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* From the Manage Taxonomy Screen */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== On the Fly from archival descriptions screen===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly from the [https://www.ica-atom.org/doc/Add/edit_archival_descriptions add/edit archival descriptions] screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points'' area.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:accesspoints.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter a name, place, or subject on the fly]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== From the Manage Taxonomy Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adding Access points to archival descriptions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Names, Places, and Subject [[Glossary#Access point|access points]] are a way of associating specific  terms contained or referenced within an information object (e.g. items within a file; a video; a picture)to its archival description, and creating searchable entry points for users. They can be conceptualized as similar to &amp;quot;tags&amp;quot; and help contextualize information objects while returning better search results. In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from authority records and taxonomies created and customized by users.Like other taxonomies and authority records in ICA-AtoM, these can be preloaded by administrators by importing SKOS xml files with predefined vocabularies and relationships, and/or created on the fly by users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Example - Adding a Place access point to archival descriptions through the taxonomies list:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Follow step 1 above, and navigate to &amp;quot;Places&amp;quot; in the Taxonomies list&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new place [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12585</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12585"/>
		<updated>2012-05-30T22:40:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* On the Fly from archival descriptions screen */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== On the Fly from archival descriptions screen===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly from the [https://www.ica-atom.org/doc/Add/edit_archival_descriptions add/edit archival descriptions] screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points'' area.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:accesspoints.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter a name, place, or subject on the fly]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== From the Manage Taxonomy Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12584</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12584"/>
		<updated>2012-05-30T22:38:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* On the Fly from archival descriptions screen */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== On the Fly from archival descriptions screen===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly from the &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;https://www.ica-atom.org/doc/Add/edit_archival_descriptions&amp;quot;&amp;gt; archival descriptions screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points'' area.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:accesspoints.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter a name, place, or subject on the fly]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== From the Manage Taxonomy Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12583</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12583"/>
		<updated>2012-05-30T22:36:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* On the Fly from archival descriptions screen */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== On the Fly from archival descriptions screen===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly from the [https://www.ica-atom.org/doc/Add/edit_archival_descriptions|Add/edit archival descriptions] screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points'' area.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:accesspoints.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter a name, place, or subject on the fly]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== From the Manage Taxonomy Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12582</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12582"/>
		<updated>2012-05-30T22:36:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== On the Fly from archival descriptions screen===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly from the [[https://www.ica-atom.org/doc/Add/edit_archival_descriptions|Add/edit archival descriptions]] screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points'' area.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:accesspoints.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter a name, place, or subject on the fly]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== From the Manage Taxonomy Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12573</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12573"/>
		<updated>2012-05-30T22:26:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly from the ''Edit information object'' screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points'' area.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:accesspoints.png|300px|centre|thumb|Enter a name, place, or subject on the fly]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12572</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12572"/>
		<updated>2012-05-30T22:20:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly from the ''Edit information object'' screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points'' area.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:accesspoints.png|300px|centre|thumb|Enter a name, place, or subject on the fly]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=File:Accesspoints.png&amp;diff=12571</id>
		<title>File:Accesspoints.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=File:Accesspoints.png&amp;diff=12571"/>
		<updated>2012-05-30T22:17:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: A screenshot of the Access Points Area in the &amp;quot;Edit Information Object&amp;quot; screen of ICA-Atom (Build 1.3)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;A screenshot of the Access Points Area in the &amp;quot;Edit Information Object&amp;quot; screen of ICA-Atom (Build 1.3)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12568</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12568"/>
		<updated>2012-05-30T22:05:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly from the ''Edit information object'' screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points'' area.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:accesspoints.png|500px|centre|thumb|Enter a name, place, or subject on the fly]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12567</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12567"/>
		<updated>2012-05-30T22:02:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly from the ''Edit information object'' screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points'' area. &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12566</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12566"/>
		<updated>2012-05-30T21:56:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class= &amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Glossary#Access point|Access points]] can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly from the ''Edit information object'' screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points area''.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12565</id>
		<title>Add a new term</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_term&amp;diff=12565"/>
		<updated>2012-05-30T21:55:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit content]] &amp;gt; [[Add/edit terms]] &amp;gt; Add a new term&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Glossary#Access point]]s can be added by users with edit permissions on the fly from the ''Edit information object'' screen by simply adding a new name, subject, or place to the corresponding field in the ''Access points area''.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:listTaxonomies.png|500px|right|thumb|Click Taxonomies in the main menu to go to a list of taxonomies in ICA-AtoM]]Click Taxonomies in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] to add a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. This will open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:addTerm.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data for the new term]]You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;cancel&amp;quot; button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|Create button]] to save the new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Browse&amp;diff=12555</id>
		<title>Browse</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Browse&amp;diff=12555"/>
		<updated>2012-05-23T23:22:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Places */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Access content]] &amp;gt; Browse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the [[Glossary#Browse menu|browse menu]] to browse complete lists of various types of records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu in default Caribou theme]]Click on a filter in the [[Glossary#Browse menu|browse menu]]. In the default Caribou theme, the [[Glossary#Browse menu|browse menu]] is a horizontal list directly below the [[Glossary#Search box|search box]]. In the Columbia and Alouette themes, it is a vertical box to the right of the [[Glossary#Search box|search box]].&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Image:authoritySearch.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse results: user has clicked on &amp;quot;authority records&amp;quot;]]By default, results are displayed ten at a time. Pagination is provided at the bottom of the page to allow users to navigate through long lists of results. [[Glossary#Administrator|Administrators]] can increase or decrease this default number (See [[Global settings#Items per page|items per page]]).&lt;br /&gt;
# The default sort order is by most recently updated. Click on Alphabetic to get an alphabetic listing.&lt;br /&gt;
# Each record type is described below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival descriptions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Displays all [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click a blue link to go to the [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Authority records ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Displays all [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click a blue link to go to the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival institutions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Displays all [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click a blue link to go to the [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Functions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
List all [[Glossary#Function|functions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a blue link to go to the [[Glossary#Function|function]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Subjects ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Displays all [[Glossary#Term|terms]] in the [[Glossary#Subject|subject]] [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] that are linked to [[Glossary#Information object|information objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Results column displays the total number of times the [[Glossary#Term|term]] has been used as a subject [[Glossary#Access point|access point]] in an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the subject [[Glossary#Term|term]] to display the ([[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]] using it as an [[Glossary#Access point|access point]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Places ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Displays all [[Glossary#Term|terms]] in the [[Glossary#Place|place]] [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] that are linked to [[Glossary#Information object|information objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Results column displays the total number of times the [[Glossary#Term|term]] has been used as a [[Glossary#Place|place]] [[Glossary#Access point|access point]] in an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the place [[Glossary#Term|term]] to display the ([[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]] using it as an [[Glossary#Access point|place access point]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Digital objects ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Returns all uploaded [[Glossary#Digital object|digital objects]] grouped by &amp;quot;Media type&amp;quot;, a metadata element automatically generated when the objects are uploaded (text, image, video etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Results column displays the total number of [[Glossary#Digital object|digital objects]] of that type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the media type to view [[Glossary#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of the [[Glossary#Digital object|digital objects]] on a new browse results page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Browse&amp;diff=12554</id>
		<title>Browse</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Browse&amp;diff=12554"/>
		<updated>2012-05-23T23:22:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Subjects */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Access content]] &amp;gt; Browse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the [[Glossary#Browse menu|browse menu]] to browse complete lists of various types of records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu in default Caribou theme]]Click on a filter in the [[Glossary#Browse menu|browse menu]]. In the default Caribou theme, the [[Glossary#Browse menu|browse menu]] is a horizontal list directly below the [[Glossary#Search box|search box]]. In the Columbia and Alouette themes, it is a vertical box to the right of the [[Glossary#Search box|search box]].&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Image:authoritySearch.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse results: user has clicked on &amp;quot;authority records&amp;quot;]]By default, results are displayed ten at a time. Pagination is provided at the bottom of the page to allow users to navigate through long lists of results. [[Glossary#Administrator|Administrators]] can increase or decrease this default number (See [[Global settings#Items per page|items per page]]).&lt;br /&gt;
# The default sort order is by most recently updated. Click on Alphabetic to get an alphabetic listing.&lt;br /&gt;
# Each record type is described below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival descriptions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Displays all [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click a blue link to go to the [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Authority records ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Displays all [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click a blue link to go to the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival institutions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Displays all [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click a blue link to go to the [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Functions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
List all [[Glossary#Function|functions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a blue link to go to the [[Glossary#Function|function]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Subjects ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Displays all [[Glossary#Term|terms]] in the [[Glossary#Subject|subject]] [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] that are linked to [[Glossary#Information object|information objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Results column displays the total number of times the [[Glossary#Term|term]] has been used as a subject [[Glossary#Access point|access point]] in an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the subject [[Glossary#Term|term]] to display the ([[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]] using it as an [[Glossary#Access point|access point]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Places ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Displays all [[Glossary#Term|terms]] in the [[Glossary#Place|place]] [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Results column displays the total number of times the [[Glossary#Term|term]] has been used as a [[Glossary#Place|place]] [[Glossary#Access point|access point]] in an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the place [[Glossary#Term|term]] to display the ([[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]] using it as an [[Glossary#Access point|place access point]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Digital objects ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Returns all uploaded [[Glossary#Digital object|digital objects]] grouped by &amp;quot;Media type&amp;quot;, a metadata element automatically generated when the objects are uploaded (text, image, video etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Results column displays the total number of [[Glossary#Digital object|digital objects]] of that type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the media type to view [[Glossary#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of the [[Glossary#Digital object|digital objects]] on a new browse results page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&amp;diff=12553</id>
		<title>Glossary</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&amp;diff=12553"/>
		<updated>2012-05-23T23:20:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Information object */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== About page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Accession record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The accession record is an administrative and descriptive document that summarizes standard information about the process of transferring materials to a repository, including information about the provenance, contents and legal and physical transfer of the records such as, rights and restrictions. See [[Entity types]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An access point is &amp;quot;A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description.&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access privilege ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[User roles]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only logged-in users can see the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add new button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Admin menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[Administer]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administrator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[User roles]] and [[Administer]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Advanced search ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:advsearch_options.png|400px|right|thumb|Advanced search screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The advanced search is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The advanced search hyperlink is located over the main search box on the ICA-AtoM home page. The user can select &amp;quot;and, or, not&amp;quot; operators, search term or phrase, and specific fields to create a powerful search query. The option to apply filters to limit or narrow the search are provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[Entity types]] and [[Add/edit archival descriptions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival institution ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An archival institution is &amp;quot;An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public&amp;quot; (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[Add/edit archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival unit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Authority record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as &amp;quot;The authorized form of name combined with other information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records.&amp;quot; See [[Entity types]] and [[Add/edit authority records]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Browse menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of filter, such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Button block ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button block allows authorized users to add, delete, move and duplicate content and to save or cancel changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Child record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Collection ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ISAD, a collection is &amp;quot;[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds.&amp;quot; In Rules for Archival Description, it is &amp;quot;[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic.&amp;quot; In Dublin Core, a collection is &amp;quot;[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Column header ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[Page types#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Context menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:context.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[Context menu]]. In the context menu, logged-in users with permission can re-arrange child level descriptions (e.g., Series, Files, Items) within the Fonds treeview by simply dragging and dropping the selected resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contributor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Controlled vocabulary ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cover flow ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[wikipedia:Cover flow|Cover flow]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allows the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A creator is &amp;quot;Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity&amp;quot; (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|Context area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Data element ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Database content ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Deaccession Record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The deaccession record is used to indicate that a repository has removed an accession, in part or whole, from the collection. Instead of deleting an [[Glossary#Accession record|accession record]], the repository will create a deaccession record that is kept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default content ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[Choose language]] and [[Translate]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Developer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Digital object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[Upload digital objects]] and [[File formats]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Donor dialog==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:donordialog.png|400px|right|thumb| donor dialog for data entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dialog that opens when adding donor contact information to the accession record or when selecting to edit an existing donor record. Donor records are located under the &amp;quot;Manage&amp;quot; tab in the menu. Donor records are only available to logged-in users with permissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Draft record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Drop-down menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A drop-down list menu is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Duplicate button ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:duplicateButtonBlock.png|500px|right|thumb|Click the &amp;quot;Duplicate&amp;quot; button in the button block to make a duplicate descriptive record]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The duplicate button appears at the bottom of the [[#View page|view page]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit duplicate|edit duplicate]]; this page is an [[#Edit page|edit page]] that is pre-populated with the existing data from the original record. The user can edit the duplicate record page and then save it as a new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit duplicate ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editduplicate.png|500px|right|thumb|Warning shown to user in duplicate record edit page]]&lt;br /&gt;
After the user clicks the [[#duplicate button|duplicate button]] the [[#Edit page|edit page]] provides a warning. The user is now editing a duplicate record (automatically draft status). After editing the duplicate record the user can click the cancel or save button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title bar|title bar]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record, e.g. to edit the &amp;quot;Administrative/biographical history&amp;quot; in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify, or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit pages allow users to add, edit and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, add, edit and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entity ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[Entity types]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Error message ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Event ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person, or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the context area of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[Entity types]] and [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field label ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding Aid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM the View archival description screen can be printed and printed and saved as a Finding Aid in pdf. The finding aid is a tool for discovering information about the fonds or collection. The creation of a finding aid provides the repository physical and intellectual control over the archival records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fonds ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as &amp;quot;The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions.&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[User interface labels]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Function ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF). See [[Entity types]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Global search/replace ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GlobalSearchReplaceGlossary.png|500px|right|thumb|Global search/replace]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Global search and replace allows administrators to query the entire database and globally replace specific terms in each field: title, alternate title, scope and content, bio/admin history etc...(see drop-down for full listing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Holdings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[ISAD#Context area|Context area]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Home page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the &amp;quot;Home&amp;quot; link on the [[#User menu|user menu]] or by clicking the [[#Site logo|site logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Information area ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Information object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An information object is another term for an [[#Archival description|archival description]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Language menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[Choose language]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Level of description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The level of description is &amp;quot;the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the &amp;quot;Identity&amp;quot; area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[ISAD#Identity area|Identity area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Master digital object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the media type [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multi-repository system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multi-value field ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Name ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons, and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]]. See [[ISAD#Access points|access points]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Page title ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says &amp;quot;View Archival institution&amp;quot; is the page title]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing; for example, it indicates whether [[#Accession record|accession records]], [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]] or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]] or an [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Parent record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit. For example, a fonds may be the parent record of a series.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Password ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to add, edit, or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[Manage user accounts#Add a new user|add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[Change password]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Physical storage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LinkPhysicalStorage.png|400px|right|thumb|Physical Storage]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves, and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects by clicking on the &amp;quot;Link physical storage&amp;quot; button in the [[#Button block|button block]] of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[Physical storage]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print Icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PrinterIcon.png|400px|right|thumb|Print Icon]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An icon of a printer is located in the title bar of the View Physical storage and Search/Advanced Search results screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Published record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArchDescPublish.png|right|thumb|500px|Select Publish]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; e.g. when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child records]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not logged in can view them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reference display copy ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the digital object area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Report Icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReportIcon.png|500px|right|thumb| Report Icon in title bar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM a report icon can be found in the title bar of the View archival description screen. Clicking on the report icon takes the user to a Reports screen and the choice of printing 3 different reports: File list, Item list or Physical storage locations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Researcher ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rights record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM Rights records can be linked to [[#Accession record|accession records]], [[#Archival descriptions|archival descriptions]] and [[#Digital objects|digital objects.]] ICA-AtoM Rights metadata elements use [http://www.loc.gov/standards/premis/ PREMIS rights elements]. In ICA-AtoM restrictions can be based on Copyright(s), License, Statute(s) and Policy. For a full explanation see [[Add/edit rights]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search box ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located over the [[#Main menu|main menu]] on all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[Access content]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[Settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading &amp;quot;Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia&amp;quot;. Note use of Columbia theme (see [[Themes]]).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[Themes]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site logo ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired: see [[Site logo]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site title ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading &amp;quot;New Caledonia Archives&amp;quot;. Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Site logo|site logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[Themes]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Static page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[Page types#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Subject ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Supported language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxonomy ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Term ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the &amp;quot;Term&amp;quot; item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Thumbnail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed in search and browse results and in [[#Cover flow|cover flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Title bar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading &amp;quot;Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Functions|functions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tooltips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:tooltips.png|500px|right|thumb|Tooltip text in an archival description edit page (the blue box on the right)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tooltips are online text designed to assist users to enter data in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Tooltip text is derived from the standards on which the edit templates are based. Note that administrators can tooltips on or off issue 2338 - see [[Global settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translation bar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on &amp;quot;Translate user interface&amp;quot; in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[Translate interface]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translation panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[Translate interface]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User account ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to add, edit, delete, or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[Manage user accounts]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User interface ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title bar|title bar]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]], and [[#Field label|field labels]], and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, edit, and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[User interface labels]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not logged in)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Username ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[Manage user accounts]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User profile ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage user accounts]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#User menu|user menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User role ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[User roles]] and [[Manage user accounts#Add a new group|Add a new group]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Value list ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Function|functions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&amp;diff=12552</id>
		<title>Glossary</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&amp;diff=12552"/>
		<updated>2012-05-23T23:17:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== About page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Accession record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The accession record is an administrative and descriptive document that summarizes standard information about the process of transferring materials to a repository, including information about the provenance, contents and legal and physical transfer of the records such as, rights and restrictions. See [[Entity types]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An access point is &amp;quot;A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description.&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access privilege ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[User roles]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only logged-in users can see the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add new button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Admin menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[Administer]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administrator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[User roles]] and [[Administer]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Advanced search ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:advsearch_options.png|400px|right|thumb|Advanced search screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The advanced search is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The advanced search hyperlink is located over the main search box on the ICA-AtoM home page. The user can select &amp;quot;and, or, not&amp;quot; operators, search term or phrase, and specific fields to create a powerful search query. The option to apply filters to limit or narrow the search are provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[Entity types]] and [[Add/edit archival descriptions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival institution ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An archival institution is &amp;quot;An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public&amp;quot; (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[Add/edit archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival unit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Authority record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as &amp;quot;The authorized form of name combined with other information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records.&amp;quot; See [[Entity types]] and [[Add/edit authority records]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Browse menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of filter, such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Button block ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button block allows authorized users to add, delete, move and duplicate content and to save or cancel changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Child record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Collection ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ISAD, a collection is &amp;quot;[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds.&amp;quot; In Rules for Archival Description, it is &amp;quot;[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic.&amp;quot; In Dublin Core, a collection is &amp;quot;[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Column header ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[Page types#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Context menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:context.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[Context menu]]. In the context menu, logged-in users with permission can re-arrange child level descriptions (e.g., Series, Files, Items) within the Fonds treeview by simply dragging and dropping the selected resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contributor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Controlled vocabulary ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cover flow ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[wikipedia:Cover flow|Cover flow]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allows the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A creator is &amp;quot;Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity&amp;quot; (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|Context area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Data element ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Database content ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Deaccession Record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The deaccession record is used to indicate that a repository has removed an accession, in part or whole, from the collection. Instead of deleting an [[Glossary#Accession record|accession record]], the repository will create a deaccession record that is kept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default content ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[Choose language]] and [[Translate]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Developer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Digital object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[Upload digital objects]] and [[File formats]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Donor dialog==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:donordialog.png|400px|right|thumb| donor dialog for data entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dialog that opens when adding donor contact information to the accession record or when selecting to edit an existing donor record. Donor records are located under the &amp;quot;Manage&amp;quot; tab in the menu. Donor records are only available to logged-in users with permissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Draft record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Drop-down menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A drop-down list menu is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Duplicate button ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:duplicateButtonBlock.png|500px|right|thumb|Click the &amp;quot;Duplicate&amp;quot; button in the button block to make a duplicate descriptive record]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The duplicate button appears at the bottom of the [[#View page|view page]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit duplicate|edit duplicate]]; this page is an [[#Edit page|edit page]] that is pre-populated with the existing data from the original record. The user can edit the duplicate record page and then save it as a new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit duplicate ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editduplicate.png|500px|right|thumb|Warning shown to user in duplicate record edit page]]&lt;br /&gt;
After the user clicks the [[#duplicate button|duplicate button]] the [[#Edit page|edit page]] provides a warning. The user is now editing a duplicate record (automatically draft status). After editing the duplicate record the user can click the cancel or save button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title bar|title bar]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record, e.g. to edit the &amp;quot;Administrative/biographical history&amp;quot; in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify, or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit pages allow users to add, edit and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, add, edit and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entity ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[Entity types]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Error message ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Event ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person, or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the context area of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[Entity types]] and [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field label ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding Aid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM the View archival description screen can be printed and printed and saved as a Finding Aid in pdf. The finding aid is a tool for discovering information about the fonds or collection. The creation of a finding aid provides the repository physical and intellectual control over the archival records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fonds ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as &amp;quot;The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions.&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[User interface labels]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Function ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF). See [[Entity types]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Global search/replace ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GlobalSearchReplaceGlossary.png|500px|right|thumb|Global search/replace]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Global search and replace allows administrators to query the entire database and globally replace specific terms in each field: title, alternate title, scope and content, bio/admin history etc...(see drop-down for full listing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Holdings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[ISAD#Context area|Context area]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Home page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the &amp;quot;Home&amp;quot; link on the [[#User menu|user menu]] or by clicking the [[#Site logo|site logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Information area ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Information object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An information object is another term for an archival description.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Language menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[Choose language]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Level of description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The level of description is &amp;quot;the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the &amp;quot;Identity&amp;quot; area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[ISAD#Identity area|Identity area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Master digital object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the media type [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multi-repository system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multi-value field ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Name ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons, and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]]. See [[ISAD#Access points|access points]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Page title ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says &amp;quot;View Archival institution&amp;quot; is the page title]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing; for example, it indicates whether [[#Accession record|accession records]], [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]] or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]] or an [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Parent record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit. For example, a fonds may be the parent record of a series.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Password ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to add, edit, or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[Manage user accounts#Add a new user|add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[Change password]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Physical storage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LinkPhysicalStorage.png|400px|right|thumb|Physical Storage]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves, and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects by clicking on the &amp;quot;Link physical storage&amp;quot; button in the [[#Button block|button block]] of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[Physical storage]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print Icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PrinterIcon.png|400px|right|thumb|Print Icon]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An icon of a printer is located in the title bar of the View Physical storage and Search/Advanced Search results screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Published record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArchDescPublish.png|right|thumb|500px|Select Publish]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; e.g. when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child records]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not logged in can view them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reference display copy ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the digital object area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Report Icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReportIcon.png|500px|right|thumb| Report Icon in title bar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM a report icon can be found in the title bar of the View archival description screen. Clicking on the report icon takes the user to a Reports screen and the choice of printing 3 different reports: File list, Item list or Physical storage locations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Researcher ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rights record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM Rights records can be linked to [[#Accession record|accession records]], [[#Archival descriptions|archival descriptions]] and [[#Digital objects|digital objects.]] ICA-AtoM Rights metadata elements use [http://www.loc.gov/standards/premis/ PREMIS rights elements]. In ICA-AtoM restrictions can be based on Copyright(s), License, Statute(s) and Policy. For a full explanation see [[Add/edit rights]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search box ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located over the [[#Main menu|main menu]] on all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[Access content]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[Settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading &amp;quot;Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia&amp;quot;. Note use of Columbia theme (see [[Themes]]).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[Themes]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site logo ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired: see [[Site logo]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site title ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading &amp;quot;New Caledonia Archives&amp;quot;. Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Site logo|site logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[Themes]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Static page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[Page types#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Subject ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Supported language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxonomy ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Term ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the &amp;quot;Term&amp;quot; item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Thumbnail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed in search and browse results and in [[#Cover flow|cover flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Title bar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading &amp;quot;Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Functions|functions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tooltips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:tooltips.png|500px|right|thumb|Tooltip text in an archival description edit page (the blue box on the right)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tooltips are online text designed to assist users to enter data in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Tooltip text is derived from the standards on which the edit templates are based. Note that administrators can tooltips on or off issue 2338 - see [[Global settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translation bar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on &amp;quot;Translate user interface&amp;quot; in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[Translate interface]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translation panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[Translate interface]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User account ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to add, edit, delete, or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[Manage user accounts]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User interface ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title bar|title bar]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]], and [[#Field label|field labels]], and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, edit, and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[User interface labels]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not logged in)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Username ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[Manage user accounts]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User profile ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage user accounts]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#User menu|user menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User role ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[User roles]] and [[Manage user accounts#Add a new group|Add a new group]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Value list ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Function|functions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=User_interface_labels&amp;diff=12551</id>
		<title>User interface labels</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=User_interface_labels&amp;diff=12551"/>
		<updated>2012-05-23T19:05:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Administer]] &amp;gt; [[Settings]] &amp;gt; User interface labels&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:userInterface.png|500px|right|thumb|Customizing user interface labels]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users of ICA-AtoM interact with six main [[Glossary#Entity|entities]]: [[Glossary#Accession record|accession record]], [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]], [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[Glossary#Function|functions]] and [[Glossary#Term|terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more on [[Glossary#Entity|entities]], see [[entity types]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ICA-AtoM, however, is built on underlying software ([[qubit:Main Page|Qubit]]) that is designed to be flexible enough to support descriptions of other types of cultural materials in addition to library holdings (such as archival, museum, and art gallery materials). The code, therefore, uses generic terms for [[Glossary#Entity|entities]]. [[Glossary#Administrator|Administrators]] can specify how they want these terms to appear in the [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] labels. The default labels that ship with ICA-AtoM represent an archives-specific &amp;quot;theming&amp;quot; of the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Go to Admin &amp;gt; Settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Open the User interface label [[Glossary#Information area|information area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The Name column shows the generic Qubit [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] name and the Value column shows ICA-AtoM's default [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] labels. The following is a list of the generic Qubit terms and their ICA-AtoM [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] labels. Click on each label to see glossary definitions and descriptions of how the terms are used in ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
* informationobject: [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]]&lt;br /&gt;
* actor: [[Glossary#Authority record|Authority record]]&lt;br /&gt;
* creator: [[Glossary#Creator|Creator]]&lt;br /&gt;
* repository: [[Glossary#Archival institution|Archival institution]]&lt;br /&gt;
* function: [[Glossary#Function|Function]]&lt;br /&gt;
* term: [[Glossary#Term|Term]]&lt;br /&gt;
* subject: [[Glossary#Subject|Subject]]&lt;br /&gt;
* collection: [[Glossary#Fonds|Fonds]]&lt;br /&gt;
* holdings: [[Glossary#Holdings|Holdings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* place: [[Glossary#Place|Place]]&lt;br /&gt;
* name: [[Glossary#Name|Name]]&lt;br /&gt;
* digitalobject: [[Glossary#Digital object|Digital object]]&lt;br /&gt;
* physicalobject: [[Glossary#Physical storage|Physical storage]]&lt;br /&gt;
* mediatype: [[Glossary#Media type|Media type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* materialtype: Material type (general material designations used in the Canadian [[Rules for Archival Description]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To change [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] labels, enter the new label(s) into the [[Glossary#Field|field(s)]] in the Value column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Click the Save button to commit changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Changing the user interface labels will not automatically change the corresponding labels in the  navigation menus. To change these menus, go to Admin &amp;gt; Menus. See the [http://ica-atom.org/doc/Manage_menus Manage menus] page of the User manual for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add/remove_languages&amp;diff=12550</id>
		<title>Add/remove languages</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add/remove_languages&amp;diff=12550"/>
		<updated>2012-05-23T18:56:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Add a language */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Administer]] &amp;gt; [[Settings]] &amp;gt; Add/remove languages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The public beta release of ICA-AtoM 1.3 (September 2012) will support fifteen languages:&lt;br /&gt;
*Dutch&lt;br /&gt;
*Farsi&lt;br /&gt;
*Galican&lt;br /&gt;
*German&lt;br /&gt;
*English&lt;br /&gt;
*French&lt;br /&gt;
*Georgian&lt;br /&gt;
*Indonesian (Bahasa)&lt;br /&gt;
*Italian&lt;br /&gt;
*Japanese&lt;br /&gt;
*Korean&lt;br /&gt;
*Portuguese&lt;br /&gt;
*Slovenian&lt;br /&gt;
*Spanish&lt;br /&gt;
*Thai&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View our translation page for the most up to date information [http://ica-atom.org/docs/index.php?title=Translate_ICA-AtoM_application here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access language setting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]] shows you the languages that are currently available in your ICA-AtoM application; the current (active) language is underlined.&lt;br /&gt;
# To add or remove one of the supported languages, Go to Admin &amp;gt; Settings from the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section to expand it; the list shows all the languages currently available in your ICA-AtoM application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AddLanguage.png|500px|right|thumb|Add/remove languages]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add a language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To add a language, select one from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] shows all languages available for ICA-AtoM (including those not yet supported).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Select the desired language and click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;ICA-AtoM adds the language and closes the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section; the added language will now appear in the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]]. To see these changes implemented in the language navigation menu at the top left corner of the screen, refresh your browser and the added language should appear as an option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Note:''' if a user selects a language that is not currently supported (i.e., where the translation XLIFF file has not yet been created), ICA-AtoM will refresh the settings screen without implementing any changes. See issue 962.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To continue adding languages, expand the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section and repeat these steps as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Remove a language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To remove a language, click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] beside it in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;ICA-AtoM removes the language and closes the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section; the removed language no longer appears in the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To remove additional languages, expand the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section and repeat these steps as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you remove a language, existing translations of [[Glossary#Database content|database content]] into that language remain in the application, but are not accessible. If you add the language back, the translations will be accessible again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support for Eastern language characters (e.g. Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc.) is not installed by default in Microsoft Windows version previous to Windows Vista.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To install Eastern language character support in older Windows versions, please visit:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev/handson/user/2kintlsupp.mspx Windows 2000]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev/handson/user/xpintlsupp.mspx#E4 Windows XP &amp;amp; Server 2003]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on languages in ICA-AtoM, see [[Translate]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add/remove_languages&amp;diff=12549</id>
		<title>Add/remove languages</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add/remove_languages&amp;diff=12549"/>
		<updated>2012-05-23T18:55:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Add a language */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Administer]] &amp;gt; [[Settings]] &amp;gt; Add/remove languages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The public beta release of ICA-AtoM 1.3 (September 2012) will support fifteen languages:&lt;br /&gt;
*Dutch&lt;br /&gt;
*Farsi&lt;br /&gt;
*Galican&lt;br /&gt;
*German&lt;br /&gt;
*English&lt;br /&gt;
*French&lt;br /&gt;
*Georgian&lt;br /&gt;
*Indonesian (Bahasa)&lt;br /&gt;
*Italian&lt;br /&gt;
*Japanese&lt;br /&gt;
*Korean&lt;br /&gt;
*Portuguese&lt;br /&gt;
*Slovenian&lt;br /&gt;
*Spanish&lt;br /&gt;
*Thai&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View our translation page for the most up to date information [http://ica-atom.org/docs/index.php?title=Translate_ICA-AtoM_application here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access language setting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]] shows you the languages that are currently available in your ICA-AtoM application; the current (active) language is underlined.&lt;br /&gt;
# To add or remove one of the supported languages, Go to Admin &amp;gt; Settings from the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section to expand it; the list shows all the languages currently available in your ICA-AtoM application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AddLanguage.png|500px|right|thumb|Add/remove languages]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add a language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To add a language, select one from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] shows all languages available for ICA-AtoM (including those not yet supported).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Select the desired language and click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;ICA-AtoM adds the language and closes the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section; the added language will now appear in the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]]. To see these changes implemented in the language navigation menu at the top left corner of the screen, refresh your browser and the added language should appear as an option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' if a user selects a language that is not currently supported (i.e., where the translation XLIFF file has not yet been created), ICA-AtoM will refresh the settings screen without implementing any changes. See issue 962.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To continue adding languages, expand the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section and repeat these steps as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Remove a language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To remove a language, click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] beside it in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;ICA-AtoM removes the language and closes the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section; the removed language no longer appears in the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To remove additional languages, expand the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section and repeat these steps as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you remove a language, existing translations of [[Glossary#Database content|database content]] into that language remain in the application, but are not accessible. If you add the language back, the translations will be accessible again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support for Eastern language characters (e.g. Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc.) is not installed by default in Microsoft Windows version previous to Windows Vista.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To install Eastern language character support in older Windows versions, please visit:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev/handson/user/2kintlsupp.mspx Windows 2000]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev/handson/user/xpintlsupp.mspx#E4 Windows XP &amp;amp; Server 2003]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on languages in ICA-AtoM, see [[Translate]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add/remove_languages&amp;diff=12548</id>
		<title>Add/remove languages</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add/remove_languages&amp;diff=12548"/>
		<updated>2012-05-23T18:55:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Add a language */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Administer]] &amp;gt; [[Settings]] &amp;gt; Add/remove languages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The public beta release of ICA-AtoM 1.3 (September 2012) will support fifteen languages:&lt;br /&gt;
*Dutch&lt;br /&gt;
*Farsi&lt;br /&gt;
*Galican&lt;br /&gt;
*German&lt;br /&gt;
*English&lt;br /&gt;
*French&lt;br /&gt;
*Georgian&lt;br /&gt;
*Indonesian (Bahasa)&lt;br /&gt;
*Italian&lt;br /&gt;
*Japanese&lt;br /&gt;
*Korean&lt;br /&gt;
*Portuguese&lt;br /&gt;
*Slovenian&lt;br /&gt;
*Spanish&lt;br /&gt;
*Thai&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View our translation page for the most up to date information [http://ica-atom.org/docs/index.php?title=Translate_ICA-AtoM_application here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access language setting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]] shows you the languages that are currently available in your ICA-AtoM application; the current (active) language is underlined.&lt;br /&gt;
# To add or remove one of the supported languages, Go to Admin &amp;gt; Settings from the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section to expand it; the list shows all the languages currently available in your ICA-AtoM application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AddLanguage.png|500px|right|thumb|Add/remove languages]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add a language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To add a language, select one from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] shows all languages available for ICA-AtoM (including those not yet supported).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Select the desired language and click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;ICA-AtoM adds the language and closes the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section; the added language will now appear in the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]]. To see these changes implemented in the language navigation menu at the top left corner of the screen, refresh your browser and the added language should appear as an option.&lt;br /&gt;
'''&lt;br /&gt;
Note:''' if a user selects a language that is not currently supported (i.e., where the translation XLIFF file has not yet been created), ICA-AtoM will refresh the settings screen without implementing any changes. See issue 962.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To continue adding languages, expand the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section and repeat these steps as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Remove a language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To remove a language, click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] beside it in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;ICA-AtoM removes the language and closes the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section; the removed language no longer appears in the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To remove additional languages, expand the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section and repeat these steps as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you remove a language, existing translations of [[Glossary#Database content|database content]] into that language remain in the application, but are not accessible. If you add the language back, the translations will be accessible again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support for Eastern language characters (e.g. Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc.) is not installed by default in Microsoft Windows version previous to Windows Vista.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To install Eastern language character support in older Windows versions, please visit:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev/handson/user/2kintlsupp.mspx Windows 2000]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev/handson/user/xpintlsupp.mspx#E4 Windows XP &amp;amp; Server 2003]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on languages in ICA-AtoM, see [[Translate]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add/remove_languages&amp;diff=12547</id>
		<title>Add/remove languages</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add/remove_languages&amp;diff=12547"/>
		<updated>2012-05-23T18:53:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Add a language */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Administer]] &amp;gt; [[Settings]] &amp;gt; Add/remove languages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The public beta release of ICA-AtoM 1.3 (September 2012) will support fifteen languages:&lt;br /&gt;
*Dutch&lt;br /&gt;
*Farsi&lt;br /&gt;
*Galican&lt;br /&gt;
*German&lt;br /&gt;
*English&lt;br /&gt;
*French&lt;br /&gt;
*Georgian&lt;br /&gt;
*Indonesian (Bahasa)&lt;br /&gt;
*Italian&lt;br /&gt;
*Japanese&lt;br /&gt;
*Korean&lt;br /&gt;
*Portuguese&lt;br /&gt;
*Slovenian&lt;br /&gt;
*Spanish&lt;br /&gt;
*Thai&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View our translation page for the most up to date information [http://ica-atom.org/docs/index.php?title=Translate_ICA-AtoM_application here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access language setting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]] shows you the languages that are currently available in your ICA-AtoM application; the current (active) language is underlined.&lt;br /&gt;
# To add or remove one of the supported languages, Go to Admin &amp;gt; Settings from the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section to expand it; the list shows all the languages currently available in your ICA-AtoM application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AddLanguage.png|500px|right|thumb|Add/remove languages]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add a language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To add a language, select one from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] shows all languages available for ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;ICA-AtoM adds the language and closes the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section; the added language will now appear in the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]]. To see these changes implemented in the language navigation menu at the top left corner of the screen, refresh your browser and the added language should appear as an option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if a user selects a language that is not currently supported (i.e., where the translation XLIFF file has not yet been created), ICA-AtoM will refresh the settings screen without implementing any changes. See issue 962.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To continue adding languages, expand the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section and repeat these steps as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Remove a language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To remove a language, click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] beside it in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;ICA-AtoM removes the language and closes the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section; the removed language no longer appears in the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To remove additional languages, expand the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section and repeat these steps as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you remove a language, existing translations of [[Glossary#Database content|database content]] into that language remain in the application, but are not accessible. If you add the language back, the translations will be accessible again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support for Eastern language characters (e.g. Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc.) is not installed by default in Microsoft Windows version previous to Windows Vista.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To install Eastern language character support in older Windows versions, please visit:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev/handson/user/2kintlsupp.mspx Windows 2000]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev/handson/user/xpintlsupp.mspx#E4 Windows XP &amp;amp; Server 2003]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on languages in ICA-AtoM, see [[Translate]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add/remove_languages&amp;diff=12546</id>
		<title>Add/remove languages</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add/remove_languages&amp;diff=12546"/>
		<updated>2012-05-23T18:42:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Add a language */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Administer]] &amp;gt; [[Settings]] &amp;gt; Add/remove languages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The public beta release of ICA-AtoM 1.3 (September 2012) will support fifteen languages:&lt;br /&gt;
*Dutch&lt;br /&gt;
*Farsi&lt;br /&gt;
*Galican&lt;br /&gt;
*German&lt;br /&gt;
*English&lt;br /&gt;
*French&lt;br /&gt;
*Georgian&lt;br /&gt;
*Indonesian (Bahasa)&lt;br /&gt;
*Italian&lt;br /&gt;
*Japanese&lt;br /&gt;
*Korean&lt;br /&gt;
*Portuguese&lt;br /&gt;
*Slovenian&lt;br /&gt;
*Spanish&lt;br /&gt;
*Thai&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View our translation page for the most up to date information [http://ica-atom.org/docs/index.php?title=Translate_ICA-AtoM_application here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access language setting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]] shows you the languages that are currently available in your ICA-AtoM application; the current (active) language is underlined.&lt;br /&gt;
# To add or remove one of the supported languages, Go to Admin &amp;gt; Settings from the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section to expand it; the list shows all the languages currently available in your ICA-AtoM application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AddLanguage.png|500px|right|thumb|Add/remove languages]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add a language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To add a language, select one from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] shows all currently supported languages available for ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;ICA-AtoM adds the language and closes the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section; the added language will now appear in the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]]. To see these changes implemented in the language navigation menu at the top left corner of the screen, refresh your browser and the added language should appear as an option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To continue adding languages, expand the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section and repeat these steps as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Remove a language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To remove a language, click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] beside it in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;ICA-AtoM removes the language and closes the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section; the removed language no longer appears in the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To remove additional languages, expand the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section and repeat these steps as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you remove a language, existing translations of [[Glossary#Database content|database content]] into that language remain in the application, but are not accessible. If you add the language back, the translations will be accessible again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support for Eastern language characters (e.g. Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc.) is not installed by default in Microsoft Windows version previous to Windows Vista.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To install Eastern language character support in older Windows versions, please visit:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev/handson/user/2kintlsupp.mspx Windows 2000]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev/handson/user/xpintlsupp.mspx#E4 Windows XP &amp;amp; Server 2003]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on languages in ICA-AtoM, see [[Translate]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add/remove_languages&amp;diff=12545</id>
		<title>Add/remove languages</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add/remove_languages&amp;diff=12545"/>
		<updated>2012-05-23T18:38:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Administer]] &amp;gt; [[Settings]] &amp;gt; Add/remove languages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The public beta release of ICA-AtoM 1.3 (September 2012) will support fifteen languages:&lt;br /&gt;
*Dutch&lt;br /&gt;
*Farsi&lt;br /&gt;
*Galican&lt;br /&gt;
*German&lt;br /&gt;
*English&lt;br /&gt;
*French&lt;br /&gt;
*Georgian&lt;br /&gt;
*Indonesian (Bahasa)&lt;br /&gt;
*Italian&lt;br /&gt;
*Japanese&lt;br /&gt;
*Korean&lt;br /&gt;
*Portuguese&lt;br /&gt;
*Slovenian&lt;br /&gt;
*Spanish&lt;br /&gt;
*Thai&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View our translation page for the most up to date information [http://ica-atom.org/docs/index.php?title=Translate_ICA-AtoM_application here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access language setting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]] shows you the languages that are currently available in your ICA-AtoM application; the current (active) language is underlined.&lt;br /&gt;
# To add or remove one of the supported languages, Go to Admin &amp;gt; Settings from the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section to expand it; the list shows all the languages currently available in your ICA-AtoM application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AddLanguage.png|500px|right|thumb|Add/remove languages]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add a language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To add a language, select one from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] shows all currently supported languages available for ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;ICA-AtoM adds the language and closes the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section; the added language will now appear in the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To continue adding languages, expand the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section and repeat these steps as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Remove a language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To remove a language, click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] beside it in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;ICA-AtoM removes the language and closes the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section; the removed language no longer appears in the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To remove additional languages, expand the &amp;quot;I18n languages&amp;quot; section and repeat these steps as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you remove a language, existing translations of [[Glossary#Database content|database content]] into that language remain in the application, but are not accessible. If you add the language back, the translations will be accessible again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Support for Eastern language characters (e.g. Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc.) is not installed by default in Microsoft Windows version previous to Windows Vista.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To install Eastern language character support in older Windows versions, please visit:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev/handson/user/2kintlsupp.mspx Windows 2000]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev/handson/user/xpintlsupp.mspx#E4 Windows XP &amp;amp; Server 2003]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on languages in ICA-AtoM, see [[Translate]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&amp;diff=12542</id>
		<title>Glossary</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&amp;diff=12542"/>
		<updated>2012-05-17T22:21:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Tooltips */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== About page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Accession record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The accession record is an administrative and descriptive document that summarizes standard information about the process of transferring materials to a repository, including information about the provenance, contents and legal and physical transfer of the records such as, rights and restrictions. See [[Entity types]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An access point is &amp;quot;A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description.&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access privilege ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[User roles]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only logged-in users can see the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add new button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Admin menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[Administer]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administrator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[User roles]] and [[Administer]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Advanced search ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:advsearch_options.png|400px|right|thumb|Advanced search screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The advanced search is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The advanced search hyperlink is located over the main search box on the ICA-AtoM home page. The user can select &amp;quot;and, or, not&amp;quot; operators, search term or phrase, and specific fields to create a powerful search query. The option to apply filters to limit or narrow the search are provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[Entity types]] and [[Add/edit archival descriptions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival institution ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An archival institution is &amp;quot;An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public&amp;quot; (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[Add/edit archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archival unit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Authority record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as &amp;quot;The authorized form of name combined with other information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records.&amp;quot; See [[Entity types]] and [[Add/edit authority records]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Browse menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of filter, such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Button block ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button block allows authorized users to add, delete, move and duplicate content and to save or cancel changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Child record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Collection ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ISAD, a collection is &amp;quot;[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds.&amp;quot; In Rules for Archival Description, it is &amp;quot;[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic.&amp;quot; In Dublin Core, a collection is &amp;quot;[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Column header ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[Page types#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Context menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:context.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[Context menu]]. In the context menu, logged-in users with permission can re-arrange child level descriptions (e.g., Series, Files, Items) within the Fonds treeview by simply dragging and dropping the selected resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contributor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Controlled vocabulary ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cover flow ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[wikipedia:Cover flow|Cover flow]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allows the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A creator is &amp;quot;Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity&amp;quot; (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|Context area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Data element ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Database content ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Deaccession Record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The deaccession record is used to indicate that a repository has removed an accession, in part or whole, from the collection. Instead of deleting an [[Glossary#Accession record|accession record]], the repository will create a deaccession record that is kept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default content ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[Choose language]] and [[Translate]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Developer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Digital object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[Upload digital objects]] and [[File formats]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Donor dialog==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:donordialog.png|400px|right|thumb| donor dialog for data entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dialog that opens when adding donor contact information to the accession record or when selecting to edit an existing donor record. Donor records are located under the &amp;quot;Manage&amp;quot; tab in the menu. Donor records are only available to logged-in users with permissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Draft record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Drop-down menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A drop-down list menu is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Duplicate button ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:duplicateButtonBlock.png|500px|right|thumb|Click the &amp;quot;Duplicate&amp;quot; button in the button block to make a duplicate descriptive record]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The duplicate button appears at the bottom of the [[#View page|view page]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit duplicate|edit duplicate]]; this page is an [[#Edit page|edit page]] that is pre-populated with the existing data from the original record. The user can edit the duplicate record page and then save it as a new record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit duplicate ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editduplicate.png|500px|right|thumb|Warning shown to user in duplicate record edit page]]&lt;br /&gt;
After the user clicks the [[#duplicate button|duplicate button]] the [[#Edit page|edit page]] provides a warning. The user is now editing a duplicate record (automatically draft status). After editing the duplicate record the user can click the cancel or save button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title bar|title bar]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record, e.g. to edit the &amp;quot;Administrative/biographical history&amp;quot; in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify, or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit pages allow users to add, edit and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, add, edit and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entity ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[Entity types]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Error message ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Event ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person, or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the context area of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[Entity types]] and [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field label ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding Aid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM the View archival description screen can be printed and printed and saved as a Finding Aid in pdf. The finding aid is a tool for discovering information about the fonds or collection. The creation of a finding aid provides the repository physical and intellectual control over the archival records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fonds ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as &amp;quot;The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions.&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[User interface labels]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Function ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF). See [[Entity types]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Global search/replace ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GlobalSearchReplaceGlossary.png|500px|right|thumb|Global search/replace]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Global search and replace allows administrators to query the entire database and globally replace specific terms in each field: title, alternate title, scope and content, bio/admin history etc...(see drop-down for full listing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Holdings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[ISAD#Context area|Context area]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Home page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the &amp;quot;Home&amp;quot; link on the [[#User menu|user menu]] or by clicking the [[#Site logo|site logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Information area ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Language menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[Choose language]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Level of description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The level of description is &amp;quot;the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds&amp;quot; (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the &amp;quot;Identity&amp;quot; area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[ISAD#Identity area|Identity area]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Master digital object ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the media type [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multi-repository system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multi-value field ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Name ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons, and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]]. See [[ISAD#Access points|access points]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Page title ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says &amp;quot;View Archival institution&amp;quot; is the page title]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing; for example, it indicates whether [[#Accession record|accession records]], [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]] or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]] or an [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Parent record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit. For example, a fonds may be the parent record of a series.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Password ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to add, edit, or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[Manage user accounts#Add a new user|add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[Change password]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Physical storage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LinkPhysicalStorage.png|400px|right|thumb|Physical Storage]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves, and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects by clicking on the &amp;quot;Link physical storage&amp;quot; button in the [[#Button block|button block]] of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[Physical storage]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print Icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PrinterIcon.png|400px|right|thumb|Print Icon]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An icon of a printer is located in the title bar of the View Physical storage and Search/Advanced Search results screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Published record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArchDescPublish.png|right|thumb|500px|Select Publish]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; e.g. when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child records]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not logged in can view them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reference display copy ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the digital object area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Report Icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReportIcon.png|500px|right|thumb| Report Icon in title bar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM a report icon can be found in the title bar of the View archival description screen. Clicking on the report icon takes the user to a Reports screen and the choice of printing 3 different reports: File list, Item list or Physical storage locations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Researcher ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rights record ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM Rights records can be linked to [[#Accession record|accession records]], [[#Archival descriptions|archival descriptions]] and [[#Digital objects|digital objects.]] ICA-AtoM Rights metadata elements use [http://www.loc.gov/standards/premis/ PREMIS rights elements]. In ICA-AtoM restrictions can be based on Copyright(s), License, Statute(s) and Policy. For a full explanation see [[Add/edit rights]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search box ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located over the [[#Main menu|main menu]] on all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[Access content]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[Settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site description ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading &amp;quot;Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia&amp;quot;. Note use of Columbia theme (see [[Themes]]).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[Themes]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site logo ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired: see [[Site logo]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site title ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading &amp;quot;New Caledonia Archives&amp;quot;. Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Site logo|site logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[Themes]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Static page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[Page types#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[Manage static pages]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Subject ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Supported language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxonomy ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Term ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the &amp;quot;Term&amp;quot; item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[Add/edit terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Thumbnail ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed in search and browse results and in [[#Cover flow|cover flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[Upload digital objects]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Title bar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading &amp;quot;Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Functions|functions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tooltips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:tooltips.png|500px|right|thumb|Tooltip text in an archival description edit page (the blue box on the right)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tooltips are online text designed to assist users to enter data in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Tooltip text is derived from the standards on which the edit templates are based. Note that administrators can tooltips on or off issue 2338 - see [[Global settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translation bar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on &amp;quot;Translate user interface&amp;quot; in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[Translate interface]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translation panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[Translate interface]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[User roles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User account ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to add, edit, delete, or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[Manage user accounts]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User interface ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title bar|title bar]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]], and [[#Field label|field labels]], and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, edit, and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[User interface labels]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not logged in)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Username ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[Manage user accounts]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User profile ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage user accounts]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#User menu|user menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User role ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[User roles]] and [[Manage user accounts#Add a new group|Add a new group]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Value list ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Function|functions]] and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Function|functions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Global_settings&amp;diff=12541</id>
		<title>Global settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Global_settings&amp;diff=12541"/>
		<updated>2012-05-17T22:20:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Show Tooltips */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Administer]] &amp;gt; [[Settings]] &amp;gt; Global settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Global settings allow [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]] to control certain aspects of how ICA-AtoM appears and behaves. Features currently controlled by global settings include:&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic notification if a new version of the software has been released&lt;br /&gt;
* The default display size of uploaded digital objects&lt;br /&gt;
* The number of search results that will be displayed on results pages&lt;br /&gt;
* Default format for accession record ID [ YEAR MONTH DAY Incremental#]&lt;br /&gt;
* Default accession counter&lt;br /&gt;
* Whether or not the reference code of an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] is inherited by lower levels attached to that description&lt;br /&gt;
* The ability to sort [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]] by title or identifier in the [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]] treeview&lt;br /&gt;
* Whether or not the application is a [[Glossary#Multi-repository system|multi-repository]] or single-institution system&lt;br /&gt;
* Default upload limit [GB]&lt;br /&gt;
* Whether or not uploading multi-page [[Glossary#Digital object|digital objects]] results in an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] being generated for each page in the object&lt;br /&gt;
* The ability to turn [[#GlossaryTooltips|tooltips]] on or off&lt;br /&gt;
* Whether new [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]] are draft or published by default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Admin &amp;gt; Settings&amp;quot; menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Global&amp;quot; [[Glossary#Information area|information area]] to display global settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:globalSettings.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit global settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Application version ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field shows the current version of the software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The value is pre-set, ships with the application, and cannot be edited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version number is automatically updated when you upgrade ICA-AtoM to a newer release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Check for updates ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If yes is selected, an administrator will automatically receive a notification if a newer version of the software has been released.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maximum image width (pixels) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:imageWidth.png|500px|right|thumb|Archival description view page showing reference display copy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of ICA-AtoM's design assumptions is that the display dimensions of files users upload typically will be too large to fit into the [[Glossary#View page|view page]] for an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]]. Therefore, when you upload a file, ICA-AtoM creates a [[Glossary#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] for displaying in the [[Glossary#View page|view page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ICA-AtoM ships with a default setting specifying the maximum width of the [[Glossary#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] at 480 pixels. This is the optimized width given ICA-AtoM's [[Glossary#Field|field]] width. [[Glossary#Administrator|Administrators]], however, can increase or decrease the maximum reference image width to suit the requirements of their institution or [[Glossary#Network|network]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;clearfix&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Results per page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, ICA-AtoM lists objects in list pages and [[Page types#Search results|search results]] ten at a time, with a pager at the bottom of the page to allow users to navigate through long lists of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Glossary#Administrator|Administrators]] can increase or decrease this default number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Accession mask ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, ICA-AtoM creates the accession record identifier as a unique number compiled from [YEAR MONTH DAY Incremental#]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Accession counter ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ICA-AtoM provides you with the number of accessions created. If you delete an accession, it will still be included in the Accession counter total value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inherit reference code (information object) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this is set to &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;, the reference code string will be built using the [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] identifier plus the identifier of all its ancestors ([[Glossary#Parent record|parent records]]). For more information about how the reference code works, see [[ISAD#Reference_code|Reference code]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sort tree view (information object) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting determines how lower-level descriptions are sorted in an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description's]] [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting &amp;quot;none&amp;quot; means the descriptions will appear in the order in which they were entered into the DCB.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting &amp;quot;title&amp;quot; sorts the descriptions by title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting &amp;quot;identifier - title&amp;quot; sorts the descriptions by identifier, then by title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sort Browser (users) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Admin can configure default sort order for the browse display as either &amp;quot;alphabetic&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;last updated&amp;quot; for logged-in users&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sort Browse (anonymous) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Admin can configure default sort order for the browse display as either, &amp;quot;alphabetic&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;last updated&amp;quot; for public users (e.g., not logged-in)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multiple repositories ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Yes if your ICA-AtoM application is acting as a union list or portal for descriptions of materials held at more than one archival institution or repository.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The repository will appear as a column on the Browse archival descriptions page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The repository will appear as a link in the [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select No if your ICA-AtoM application is being used only by a single institution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Glossary#Creator|creator]] rather than the repository will now appear as a column on the list archival description page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No repository link will appear in the [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default upload limit [GB] ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-1 is the value for unlimited upload. This setting can be modified by the Administrator&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Upload multi-page files as multiple descriptions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select yes if you would like each page of a multi-page file to be attached to a separate child-level description. For example, a PDF file with 10 pages uploaded to a description would result in 10 individual descriptions, one for each page in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Show Tooltips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select yes to to have [[Glossary#Tooltips|tooltips]] appear in [[Glossary#edit page|edit pages]] as the user enters data. issue 2338&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default publication status ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting determines whether new [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]] will automatically appear as [[Glossary#Draft record|draft records]] or [[Glossary#Published|published records]]. Note that this setting also affects imported descriptions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=User_roles&amp;diff=12539</id>
		<title>User roles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=User_roles&amp;diff=12539"/>
		<updated>2012-05-10T20:10:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Translator */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Getting started]] &amp;gt; User roles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your [[Glossary#User account|user account]] in ICA-AtoM is tied to one of five [[Glossary#User role|user roles]], each representing a different level of access to the system. [[Glossary#Administrator|Administrators]] can add and modify [[Glossary#User role|user roles]]: see [[manage user accounts]] and [[edit permissions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Researcher ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A researcher is any user who is not logged in and therefore has view-only access to the application. A researcher can search and browse descriptions (published [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]], [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institutions]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contributor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contributor can search, browse, create, edit and export descriptions. The contributor cannot change the publication status of an information object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An editor can search, browse, create, edit, publish, delete and export descriptions and edit [[Glossary#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[Glossary#Term|terms]]. An editor can also change the publication status of an information object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A translator can search and browse published descriptions and can translate [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[Glossary#Database content|database content]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A translator should be able to view draft descriptions, but not edit them. This is a known issue - see: issue 1718 issue 2331&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administrator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can import, export, create, read, update, publish and delete any record in the system, can customize application to institution specific requirements, and can manage [[Glossary#User account|user accounts]] and profiles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=User_roles&amp;diff=12538</id>
		<title>User roles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=User_roles&amp;diff=12538"/>
		<updated>2012-05-10T20:09:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Editor */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Getting started]] &amp;gt; User roles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your [[Glossary#User account|user account]] in ICA-AtoM is tied to one of five [[Glossary#User role|user roles]], each representing a different level of access to the system. [[Glossary#Administrator|Administrators]] can add and modify [[Glossary#User role|user roles]]: see [[manage user accounts]] and [[edit permissions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Researcher ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A researcher is any user who is not logged in and therefore has view-only access to the application. A researcher can search and browse descriptions (published [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]], [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institutions]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contributor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contributor can search, browse, create, edit and export descriptions. The contributor cannot change the publication status of an information object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An editor can search, browse, create, edit, publish, delete and export descriptions and edit [[Glossary#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[Glossary#Term|terms]]. An editor can also change the publication status of an information object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A translator can search and browse published descriptions and can translate [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[Glossary#Database content|database content]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A translator should be able to view draft descriptions, but not edit them. This is a known issue - see: [http://code.google.com/p/qubit-toolkit/issues/detail?id=2331&amp;amp;thanks=2331&amp;amp;ts=1336677302#makechanges issue 1718][http://code.google.com/p/qubit-toolkit/issues/detail?id=1718 issue 2331]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administrator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can import, export, create, read, update, publish and delete any record in the system, can customize application to institution specific requirements, and can manage [[Glossary#User account|user accounts]] and profiles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=User_roles&amp;diff=12537</id>
		<title>User roles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=User_roles&amp;diff=12537"/>
		<updated>2012-05-10T20:08:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Contributor */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Getting started]] &amp;gt; User roles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your [[Glossary#User account|user account]] in ICA-AtoM is tied to one of five [[Glossary#User role|user roles]], each representing a different level of access to the system. [[Glossary#Administrator|Administrators]] can add and modify [[Glossary#User role|user roles]]: see [[manage user accounts]] and [[edit permissions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Researcher ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A researcher is any user who is not logged in and therefore has view-only access to the application. A researcher can search and browse descriptions (published [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]], [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institutions]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contributor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contributor can search, browse, create, edit and export descriptions. The contributor cannot change the publication status of an information object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An editor can search, browse, create, edit, publish, delete and export descriptions and edit [[Glossary#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[Glossary#Term|terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A translator can search and browse published descriptions and can translate [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[Glossary#Database content|database content]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A translator should be able to view draft descriptions, but not edit them. This is a known issue - see: [http://code.google.com/p/qubit-toolkit/issues/detail?id=2331&amp;amp;thanks=2331&amp;amp;ts=1336677302#makechanges issue 1718][http://code.google.com/p/qubit-toolkit/issues/detail?id=1718 issue 2331]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administrator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can import, export, create, read, update, publish and delete any record in the system, can customize application to institution specific requirements, and can manage [[Glossary#User account|user accounts]] and profiles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=User_roles&amp;diff=12536</id>
		<title>User roles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=User_roles&amp;diff=12536"/>
		<updated>2012-05-10T20:05:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Fiver: /* Translator */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main Page]] &amp;gt; [[User manual]] &amp;gt; [[Getting started]] &amp;gt; User roles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your [[Glossary#User account|user account]] in ICA-AtoM is tied to one of five [[Glossary#User role|user roles]], each representing a different level of access to the system. [[Glossary#Administrator|Administrators]] can add and modify [[Glossary#User role|user roles]]: see [[manage user accounts]] and [[edit permissions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Researcher ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A researcher is any user who is not logged in and therefore has view-only access to the application. A researcher can search and browse descriptions (published [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]], [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institutions]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contributor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contributor can search, browse, create, edit and export descriptions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An editor can search, browse, create, edit, publish, delete and export descriptions and edit [[Glossary#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[Glossary#Term|terms]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A translator can search and browse published descriptions and can translate [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[Glossary#Database content|database content]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A translator should be able to view draft descriptions, but not edit them. This is a known issue - see: [http://code.google.com/p/qubit-toolkit/issues/detail?id=2331&amp;amp;thanks=2331&amp;amp;ts=1336677302#makechanges issue 1718][http://code.google.com/p/qubit-toolkit/issues/detail?id=1718 issue 2331]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administrator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can import, export, create, read, update, publish and delete any record in the system, can customize application to institution specific requirements, and can manage [[Glossary#User account|user accounts]] and profiles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:User manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Fiver</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>